!N 


ORP 


iWU. 


ACCIDENT  AND  DISEASE 


A  MANUAL 


>ARED  FOR  THE  USE  OF  STUDENTS  OF  THE 
TRAINING  SCHOOL  FOR  FARfi*ER8 
AND  HORSESHOERS 
3V  THE 

TRAINING  SCHOOL  INSTRUCTORS 

1909 


LIBRARY 

OF   THE 

University  of  California. 


GIFT    OF 


I/O  •  j .    Uj 


Class 


THE  ARMY  HORSE 


IN 


ACCIDENT  AND  DISEASE 

EDITION:  1909 


A  MANUAL  PREPARED  FOR  THE  USE  OF 
STUDENTS  OF  THE  TRAINING  SCHOOL 
FOR  FARRIERS  AND  HORSESHOERS  BY 
THE  TRAINING  SCHOOL  INSTRUCTORS 


MOUNTED  SERVICE  SCHOOL 
FORT  RILEY,  KANSAS 


WASHINGTON 

GOVERNMENT   PRINTING   OFFICE 

1909 


lt«1 


-•^& 


W  A.K    I>  EPA  R  TM  KNT 

Document  No.  347. 
( >n,,.   of  <  hi,)  o)  Staff. 


«/ 


War  Department, 

OfFH  E    OF    THE    (  HIEF    OF    STAFF, 

Washington,  October  8,  1909. 
The  Army  Horse  in  Accident  and  Disease,  Revised  1909,  prepared 
at  the  Mounted  Service  School,  Fort  Riley,  Kans.,  for  the  use  of 
students  of  the  training  school  for  farriers  and  horseshoers,  as  well 
as  for  the  army  at  large  and  the  organized  militia,  is  issued  for  the 
information  and  guidance  of  all  concerned. 
By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

J.  Franklin  Bell, 
Major  Gi  neral,  (  Tiief  of  Staff. 


190989 


AUTHORITIES  CONSULTED. 


Bureau  of  Animal  Industry:  Special  IN 'port  on  Diseases  of  the  Borse. 

Cadiot:  A  Treatise  on  Veterinary  Therapeutics  of  the  Domestic  Animals. 

Chauveau:  Comparative  Anatomy  of  Domesticated  Animals. 

Dun:  Veterinary  Medicines,  Their  Actions  and  Uses. 

Fleming:  Operative  Veterinary  Surgery. 

Friedburger  And  Frohner:  Pathology  and  Therapeutics  of  the  Domestic  Animals. 

Goubaux  and  Barrier :  The  Exterior  of  the  Horse.     (Translation. 

Law:  Veterinary  Medicine 

Liautard:  Manual  of  Veterinary  Surgery. 

Moller:  Operative  Veterinary  Surgery.     (Translation.) 

Neumann:  Parasites  and  Parasitic  Disease-  of  the  Domesticated  Animal.-. 

Quitman:  Notes  on  Veterinary  Medicine. 

Smith:  Veterinary  Hygiene. 

Smith:  A  Manual  of  Veterinary  Physiology. 

Strangeway:  Veterinary  Anatomy. 

Williams:  Principles  and  Practice  of  Veterinary  Medicine  and  Surgery. 

Winslow:  Materia  Medica. 

Wyman:  Diagnosis  of  Lameness  in  the  Horse 


CONTENTS, 


Chapter  I. — Conformation  and  Points.     Defects  and  Blemishes. 
II. — Stable  Management  of  the  Sick  and  Injured. 
III. — Anatomy. 

IV. — Administration  of  Medicines.     Weights  and  Measures. 
V. — Wounds,  Sprains,  Bruises,  Abrasions,  and  Abscesses. 
VI. — Diseases  of  the   Respiratory  System  and  Influenza. 
VII.— Diseases    of   the    Digestive,  Urinary,    Nervous,    and    Lymphatic 

Systems. 
VIII. — Miscellaneous   Diseases. 
IX. — Diseases  of  the  Skin  and  Eye. 

X. — DlSEAS.ES    OF   THE    FEET. 

XI. — Diseases  of   Bone  and  Detection  of   Lameness. 
XII. — Age  by  the  Teeth. 
XIII. — Tropical  Diseases. 
XIV. — Medicines,  Their  Actions  and   Uses. 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Frontispiece.     Attendance  at  operation. 
I'i  \  1 1      I       Points  <>f  the  horse. 
I  I       The  horse  in  slings. 
III.   -Skeleton  of  the  horse. 
I  V.     Muscles  and  tendons  of  the  horse. 
V. — Respiratory  apparatus. 
VI. — Digestive  apparatus. 
VII.  —  Circulatory  apparatus. 
VIII.     Section  of  the  eye. 
IX. — Section  of  the  hoof  and  pastern. 
X. — Fig.  1,  Curb.     Fig.  2,  Bursal  enlargement.     Fig.  3,  Sprain  of    the  flexor 

tendons  (bowed  tendons).     Fig.  4,  Line  firing.     Fig.  5,  Capped  hock. 
XI.     Fig.  1,  Fistulous  withers.     Fig.  2,  Poll  evil. 
XII. — Characteristic  symptoms  of  spasmodic  colic. 
XIII.      Lymphangitis. 
XIV. — Purpura  hemorrhagica. 

XV.  —  Farcy. 
XVI.— Tetania. 
XVII. — Grease. 
XVIII.— Fig.  J,  Sidebone.     Fig.  2,  Ringbone.    Fig.  3,  Bone  spavin.    Fig.  4,  Splint. 

XIX. — Longitudinal  section  and  cross  sections  of  lower  incisor. 
XlXa. — Surra:  characteristic  swellings. 
\  X. — Surra  parasite. 
XXI. — Chronic  epizootic  lymphangitis  (tropical). 

6 


•x    o    3 


*?     (3 


3  3  -s  ra  § 

on  i.  o  *J  •-< 

ca  c  c  0)  c 

Ph  O  fn  ft,  Pm 


^  Ei  QQ  W  rh 


3     c   -*   -*     = 


-    ©    a>    03    o 


O  O  fc  —  — 


x 


/. 

— 

■- 

Si 

Z 

£i 

Ph 

£  -= 

Ph     O 

00    OS 

s  -s 

N    ri    N   N«N«   N   N   M   N     M    « 


a  *  •*     •£ 


—  cS   .X 


8  «  8  "2 

.i  *^  rv.  rv. 


■1. 

J 

44 

__ 

3 
— 

-* 

d 

s 

00 

-- 

_£ 

- 

s 
1-5 

-= 

fc 

il 

:- 

Pi 

fe 

w 

£ 

- 

t^ 

X 

oi 

3 

-' 

- 

71 

M 

m 

T 

iC 

- 

r- 

THE  ARMY  HORSE  IN  ACCIDENT  AND  DISEASE. 


CHAPTER  I. 

CONFORMATION  AND  POINTS— DEFECTS  AND  BLEMISHES. 

CONFORMATION  AND  POINTS. 

(I'latel.) 

The  forehead  should  be  broad  and  not  bulging;;  the  eyes  full,  clear. 
and  prominent,  with  a  mild  expression,  and  not  showing  any  of  the 
white;  the  muzzle  not  too  large,  as  a  coarse,  large  muzzle  indicates 
ill  breeding;  the  nostrils  large  and  open:  the  face  straight;  and  the 
lower  jaw  with  ample  width  between  the  two  sides,  for  the  develop- 
ment and  play  of  the  larynx  (Adam's  apple)  and  windpipe,  and,  in 
addition,  to  allow  the  head  to  be  nicely  bent  on  the  neck. 

The  ears  should  be  of  medium  size,  set  well  on  the  head  and  held 
erect. 

The  parotid  and  submaxillary  regions  should  be  free  from  large 
glands  and  without  any  loose  skin  at  the  lower  part  of  the  throat. 

The  neck  should  be  of  moderate  length,  clean  and  not  too  narrow 
at  a  point  just  in  rear  of  the  throat;  a  short,  thick  neck  does  not  allow 
of  free  movement  from  side  to  side,  and  a  long,  slim  neck  is  apt  to  be 
too  pliable.  A  neck  with  concave  upper  border,  known  as  "ewe 
neck"  is  unsightly.  The  jugular  channel  or  furrow  should  be  free 
from  enlargements.  The  point  of  the  shoulder  should  be  well  devel- 
oped. The  point  of  the  elbow  should  not  be  turned  in,  as  the  horse 
in  that  case  is  apt  to  turn  his  toes  out;  the  opposite  conformation 
results  in  the  condition  called  '  pigeontoed." 

The  forearm  should  be  long  and  muscular;  the  knee  broad,  and 
when  Looked  at  from  the  front,  much  wider  than  the  limb  above  and 
below,  but  tapering  oil'  backward  to  a  comparatively  thin  edge.  A 
bending  of  the  knee  backward  is  called  a  "calf  knee,"  and  is  very  ob- 
jectionable.    The  opposite  condition  is  known  as  "knee  sprung.'' 

The  cannon  should  be  of  uniform  size;  if  smaller  just  below  the 
knee  than  elsewhere  (a  condition  called  "tied  in"),  weakness  is  to  be 
expected. 


10  THE    .\l;.\n     BOESE    IN    ACCIDENT    AXH   DISEASE. 

The  fetlock  joint  should  be  of  good  size  and  clean;  the  pasterns  of 
moderate  Length,  and  forming  an  angle  of  between  15  and  50  degrees 
w  ith  the  ground  or  floor. 

'Idie  foot  should  be  of  moderate  size:  a  Hat  foot  or  one  too  narrow 

at  the  heels  is  objectionable. 

The  relative  proportions  of  the  shoulders  and  the  exact  shape  de- 
sirable vary  considerably  in  cavalry  and  artillery  horses.  Tims,  when 
speed  and  activity  are  essential,  as  in  the  cavalry  horse,  the  shoulder 
should  be  oblique  (sloping),  as  this  shape  gives  elasticity  to  the  gait 
of  the  horse.  For  the  artillery  horse,  working  in  harness,  :i  more  up- 
right shoulder  hears  the  pressure  of  the  collar  more  evenly,  and  when 
the  collar  is  at  right  angle  to  the  traces  the  horse  exerts  his  strength 
to  the  greatest  advantage.  The  front  line  of  the  shoulder  must  be 
clearly  marked;  an  irregular  surface  or  excessive  muscular  develop- 
ment in  the  region  marked  .V  (Plate  I)  prevents  a  close  fit  of  the 
collar. 

The  withers  should  not  be  thin  and  high,  as  this  conformation  will 
allow  the  saddle  to  slip  too  far  forward  and  the  pommel  will  rest  upon 
the  withers.  The  bars  of  the  saddle  will  be  forced  against  the  shoulder 
blades,  causing  irritation  and  inflammation,  and  preventing  free  mo- 
tion of  the  shoulders;  the  constraint  causes  stumbling.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  withers  should  not  be  low  or  thick,  as  the  -addle  is  then 
apt  to  pinch  them. 

The  breast  and  chest  should  be  of  moderate  width  and  have  con- 
siderable depth;  the  narrow  chest  indicates  weakness,  and  the  wide, 
heavy  chest  is  suitable  for  heavy-draft  horses  only. 

The  capacity  of  the  lungs  is  marked  by  the  size  of  the  chest  at  the 
girth,  but  the  stamina  will  depend  upon  the  length  of  the  back  ribs. 
The  barrel  should  not  be  broad  back  of  the  cinch,  as  it  would  cause 
the  cinch  to  slip  forward  and  chafe  the  body  just  back  of  the  point 
of  the  elbow.  The  opposite  conformation  would  allow  the  saddle  and 
cinch  to  slip  backward.  The  back  should  be  short,  with  muscles  well 
developed,  and  the  upper  lines  of  the  back  bending  down  a  little  he- 
hind  the  withers  and  then  swelling  out  very  gently  to  the  junction  of 
the  loins,  which  can  hardly  he  too  broad  and  muscular. 

The  last  rib  should  he  placed  close  to  the  point  of  the  hip,  as  this 
is  an  indication  of  strength,  and  the  horse  is  more  easily  kept  in  good 
condition  than  one  having  the  opposite  conformation. 

A  slightly  arched  loin  is  essential  to  the  power  of  carrying  weight  : 
the  concave  or  ''sway-hack"  is  therefore  a  sign  of  weakness;  the 
much  arched  or  u  roach  hack  "  is  almost  sure  togiveuneasy  action  from 
its  w  ant  of  elasticity. 

The  hips  should  be  broad,  smooth,  and  muscular. 

The  croup  should  he  well  rounded,  should  slope  slightly  downward 
and  be  of  moderate  length:    both  the  straight,  horizontal  croup  and 


DEFECTS   AND   BLEMISHES.  11 

the  drooping  croup  arc  unsightly;  when  the  croup  droops  and  also 
becomes  narrow  below  the  tail,  the  conformation  is  known  as  "goose 
rump"  and  is  a  sign  of  weakness. 

The  <lock  should  be  large  and  muscular;  the  tail  carried  firmly  and 
well  away  from  the  quarters. 

The  quarter  (thigh  and  buttock)  and  gaskin  should  he  broad. 
The  muscles  of  the  two  quarters  should  come  (dose  together,  leaving 
no  hollow  below  the  anus;  the  widely  separated  conformation  is  an 
indication  of  a  want  of  constitul  ion. 

The  hock  should  he  of  good  size,  hut  (dean  and  flat,  and  with  a 
good  clean  point  standing  (dear  of  the  joint.  The  two  hocks  should 
stand  well  apart,  but  not  enough  to  give  the  horse  the  appearance 
of  being  "bow-legged."  "Cow-hocked,"  so  called,  is  when  the 
hocks  stand  (dose  together  and  the  hind  feet  wide  apart,  with  the  toes 
turned  out. 

If  the  hocks  stand  in,  it  will  he  noticed  that  the  stifles  stand  out, 
and  the  reverse.  "Straight  hock"  and  "crooked  hock"  are  terms 
used  to  express  the  shape  of  the  hind  leg  as  seen  from  the  side;  both 
shapes  are  objectionable.  "Sickle  hock"  describes  the  curve  which 
results  from  a  crooked  bock,  a  short  cannon,  and  a  sloping  pastern. 

The.cannon  should  be  short ,  not  tied  in  below  the  hock,  and  the  line 
from  the  point  of  the  hock  to  the  back  part  of  the  fetlock  should  be 
straight. 

The  fetlock  when  bent  forward  is  an  indication  of  weakness  known 
as  "cocked  ankle."  The  hind  fetlocks,  pasterns,  and  feet  should 
correspond  to  those  of  the  fore  extremity,  but  the  pasterns  are  usually 
more  upright. 

DEFECTS    AND    BLEMISHES. 

Defects  and  blemishes  are  those  results  of  injuries  (more  or  less 
severe)  which  show  on  the  outside  of  the  body.  They  are  regarded 
as  external  diseases,  and  may  he  classed  as  follows: 

1 .  Diseases  of  bones. 

2.  Diseases  of  synovial  membranes. 

3.  Diseases  of  muscles,  tendons,  ligaments,  and  skin. 
I .  Diseases  of  the  foot . 

1 .  Diseasi  s  <>f  bom  s. 

Bone  spavin.  -Location:  Lower  and  inner  part  of  the  hock  joint. 

Splints. — Location:  Usually  appearing  on  the  inner  side  of  the 
upper  third  of  the  front  cannon;  occasionally  found  on  the  outer  side 
of  the  upper  third  of  the  hind  cannon. 

Sidebones  (ossification  of  lateral  cartilages).  Location:  Sides  of 
the  foot  just  above  the  coronet . 

Ringbone. — Location:  Between  coronet   and   fetlock   joint. 


\'2  I  ill.   Ali.MY    EORSE    IN    ACCIDENT   AND   DISEASE. 

.'.    Diseases  of  .synovial  no  mbranes. 

Hoy  .spavin. — Location:   Front  part  of  hock  joint. 

Thorough-fin. —  Location:  Upper  and  back  part  of  hock  joint. 

Wind  puffs  (windfalls i. — Location:  On   the  sides  of  the  tendons 
just  above  the  fetlock  joints. 

Other  bursal  enlargements   (distended  synovial  sacs  or  pouches 
may  be  found  located  on  various  parts  of  the  legs,  hut    no   special 
name  has  been  given  to  them. 

.)'.   Diseases  ofthi  muscles,  U  ndons,  ligamt  nts,  <in<l  .skin. 

Poll  (vil. — Location:  In  the  region  of  the  poll. 

Fistulous  withers. — Location:  Jn   the  region   of  the  withers. 

Sweeny  (atrophy  or  wasting  of  the  muscles). — Location:   Usually 
in  the  shoulder  or  the  hi]). 

Broken  knees. — Location:  Front  part   of  the  knee  joint. 

( 'a lipid  i  Ibow. — Location:  Point  of  the  elhow. 

Cappedhock. — Location:  Point  of  the  hock. 

( 'urb. — Location:  Lower  and  back  part  of  the  hock. 

Sprung  knees. — Location:  Knees. 

Cocked  ankles. — Location:  Fetlock  joints. 

Bowed  tendons. — Location:  Flexor   tendons   below    the   knee   and 
hock. 

Breakdown. — Location:  Sprain  of  the  suspensory  ligament. 

Saddle  galls. — Location:  On  the  saddle  bed. 

CinchgaUs. — Location:  On  the  parts  coming  in  contact  with  the 
cinch. 

Collar  galls. — Location :  On  the  parts  coming  in  contact  with  the 
collar. 

4-  Diseases  of  tit  (foot. 

Th rush . — Location  :  Fr< >g. 

( 'ankt  r. — Location :  Frog  and  sole. 

Chronic  laniinitis. — Location:  Sensitive  lamina'. 

To///.-    Location:  Between  the  wall  and  bar. 

Falsi  quarter  and  quarter  crack.—  Location:  Quarters  of  the  hoof. 

Quittor  —  Location:  Top  of  the  coronet. 

( 'ontracted  heels. —  Location  :  Heels. 

To<  cracks.  1  L(((..lt  i((]1.  At  the  toe  of  the  hoof . 
Seedy  toe.     * 


CHAPTER  II. 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  SICK  AND  INJURED. 

(ARE  OF  THE  SICK. 

The  sick  horse  should,  if  practicable,  be  immediate^  removed  to  a 
large,  clean,  light  and  well-ventilated  box  stall,  free  from  drafts  and 
located  as  far  as  possible  from  other  horses.  Clean  bedding  should 
be  provided,  and  the  stall  kept  free  from  manure  and  moisture.  If 
such  a  stall  can  not  be  provided  a  double  stall,  with  the  kicking  bar 
removed  and  ropes  or  bars  placed  across  the  front  of  it,  will  answer 
the  purpose. 

If  the  patient  is  suffering  from  a  febrile  disease  (fever)  during  the 
cold  season  of  the  year,  paulins  or  horse  covers  can  be  hung  up  in  such 
a  manner  as  to  serve  as  a  protection  from  drafts,  care  being  taken  to 
allow  sufficient  air  to  enter  this  improvised  box  stall.  Such  patients 
must  be  clothed  according  to  the  season  of  the  year,  the  blanket 
drawn  well  forward  on  the  neck  and  fastened  in  front,  the  legs,  after 
hand-rubbing,  bandaged  with  red  flannels.  The  bandages  should  be 
changed  several  times  daily,  and  the  legs  thoroughly  rubbed  to  stimu- 
late circulation. 

Horses  with  diseases  of  the  nervous  system  require  to  be  kept 
absolutely  quiet,  and  must  be  removed  as  far  as  possible  from  all 
noise.  It  is  preferable  that  only  one  man  be  allowed  to  attend  to 
their  wants,  as  a  change  of  attendants  would  very  likely  cause  excite- 
ment and  thus  increase  the  severity  of  the  disease.  Animals  suffering 
from  debilitating  diseases  should  be  tempted  with  and  fed  any  food 
that  is  rich  in  nourishment  and  easily  digested.  Salt  should  fre- 
quently be  added.  The  food,  etc.,  should  be  given  only  in  such 
quantities  as  the  animal  will  readily  eat,  and  any  portion  left  over 
should  be  at  once  removed,  as  food  constantly  placed  before  a  sick 
animal  will  have  a  tendency  to  deprive  it  of  all  appetite.  Food  that 
is  wet,  such  as  bran  mashes  or  steamed  oats,  will  soon  sour  in  warm 
weather  and  will  get  cold  or  may  freeze  during  the  winter:  if  eaten 
in  these  conditions  it  may  cause  diarrhea,  colic,  etc.  Feed  boxes, 
water  buckets,  and  all  parts  of  the  stall  must  be  kept  clean  and  free 

L3 


14  THE   ARMY    EOBSE    IN    ACCIDENT    AND   DISEASE. 

from  odor.  The  hay  should  be  clean  and  bright,  an  I  only  the  best 
given  to  i he  sick  animal.  Pure  w ater  should  be  provided,  and  placed 
in  such  a  position  as  to  enable  the  animal  to  reach  it  without  difficulty  , 
a  sick  horse  will  frequently  rinse  the  lips  and  mouth  with  water  if 
given  the  opportunity,  even  when  not  thirsty.  The  water  should  be 
changed  as  often  as  accessary  during  the  day  to  insure  a  pure  and 
fresh  supply  at  all  times. 

A  horse  suffering  from  colic  requires  sufficient  space,  well  bedded, 
to  prevent   injuring  himself  by  rolling  during  a  spasm  of  pa' 
man  should  be  constantly  in  attendance,  as  there  is  danger  th.  . 
animal  may  become  cast  and  be  una  hie  to  get  up  without  assistance. 

Undigested  matter  being  the  exciting  cause  in  almost  all  cac 
colic,  food  should  be  withheld  for  about  twelve  hours  after  ah  .  n 
has  disappeared,  and  then  given  only  in  small  quantities  during  the 
next  twenty-four  hours,  after  which  the  ordinary  ration  may  he  re- 
sumed. A  few  swallows  of  pure  water  may  be  given  at  short  interval-, 
hut  special  care  must  be  taken  when  the  water  is  very  cold. 

The  pulse  is  the  beating  of  the  arteries,  usually  felt  at  the  jaw  (the 
submaxillary  artery),  and  is  an  important  guide  in  determining  the 
physical  condition  of  the  animal:  the  normal  pulsations  are  ab<  t  4u 
per  minute.  The  count  is  best  taken  by  placing  tin1  fore  or  n  Idle 
finger  transversely  on  the  artery.  The  slightest  excitement,  when 
the  horse  is  sick,  will  cause  an  alteration  in  the  pulse:  therefore  the 
animal  should  be  approached  very  quietly.  A  strong  and  full  ...oc 
is  an  indication  of  health. 

In  the  first  stages  of  fever  the  pulse  is  full  and  bounding,  after- 
wards becoming  small  and  weak.  A  very  slow  pulse  denotes  disease 
or  injury  of  the  brain  or  spinal  cord.  An  imperceptible  pulse  indi- 
cates t  he  approach  of  death. 

At  rest  the  healthy  horse  breathes  from  13  to  1.")  times  per  minute. 
Difficult  or  rapid  breathing  is  a  prominent  symptom  of  disease  of  the 
respiratory  organs;  it  may  also  be  observed  in  some  cases  of  flatulent 
colic.  Abdominal  breathing  is  the  respiratory  movement  perfo-  ' 
with  the  ribs  fixed  as  much  as  possible,  owing  to  pain  or  mechanical 
obstruction  in  the  chest,  and  is  a  symptom  of  pleurisy  and  hy  : 
thorax  (w  ater  in  the  chest  ). 

Irregular  breathing  is  that  condition  where  there  is  a  want  of 
harmonious  correspondence  between  the  inspiratory  and  expiratory 
movements,  and  is  observed  in  the  disease  commonly  known  as 
"broken  wind"  or  "heaves."  The  inspiratory  movement  in  this 
affection  is  performed  quickly  and  with  jerky  effort,  while  the  expi- 
ratory  movement    is   performed   slowly  and   with  a  double  action, 

re    particularly   of    the    abdominal    muscles.      Irregular  breathing 

often  becomes  spasmodic  or  convulsive  during  the  progress  of  the 
disease.      The  condition  and  color  of  the  visible  mucous  membranes 


STABLE    MANAGEMENT    OF    SICK    AND    [NJUBED.  15 

should  be  closely  observed;  as  will  be  learned  in  detail  later,  they  are 
an  important  guide  in  determining  the  physical  condition  of  the 
animal. 

lite  normal  temperature  of  the  horse  in  the  internal  part  which 
is  i,  >s1  easily  accessible,  the  rectum,  may  be  estimated  at  from  99° 
to  101°  F.  In  very  young  animals  the  temperature  is  commonly 
about  101°,  but  in  very  old  ones  it  has  been  known  to  be  as  low  as 
96°  F.  The  temperature  of  the  external  parts  of  the  body  becomes 
according  to  their  distance  from  the  heart,  and  liable  to  much 
..tion  from  the  state  of  the  surrounding  atmosphere.  Fever  is 
an  elevation  of  temperature. 

The  production  of  animal  beat  is  due  to  certain  chemical  and  vital 
.ges  which  are  continually  taking  place  in  the  body ;  these  changes 
consist  in  the  absorption  of  oxygen  by  the  capillaries  in  the  lungs,  and 
the  combination  of  that  oxygen  with  the  carbon  and  hydrogen  derived 
(first)  from  the  disintegration  of  animal  tissues  and  (second)  from  cer- 
tain elements  of  the  food  which  have  not  been  converted  into  tissue. 

This  combination  with  oxygen,  or  oxidation,  not  only  takes  place 
in  the  blood,  which  may  be  looked  upon  as  a  fluid  tissue,  but  in  the 
t  iss  •  cells  also,  in  all  parts  of  the  body,  the  animal  heat  being  main- 
tain 'd  by  the  natural  changes  which  are  essential  to  a  healthy 
condition. 

As  previously  stated,  oxygen  is  absorbed  from  the  air  by  the  capil- 
'  s  of  the  lungs  in  respiration  (breathing).  Expired  air  is  found 
to  have  lost  about  10  per  cent  of  the  oxygen  contained  in  pure  air, 
and  to  have  accumulated  a  like  amount  of  a  combination  of  carbon 
and  oxygen,  called  carbonic  acid  gas.  If  we  imagine  the  animal 
breathing  and  rebreathing  the  same  air,  it  can  be  seen  that  the  oxygen, 
so  necessary  for  the  purification  of  the  blood,  would  soon  diminish 
to  a  dangerous  degree.  Hence,  we  realize  the  importance  of  a  large 
supply  of  air  to  draw  on  and  the  necessity  of  good  ventilation.  At 
each  inspiration  the  horse  draws  about  250  cubic  inches  of  air  into 
i]- •'  .lungs,  and  he  therefore  requires  about  2  cubic  feet  per  minute, 
or  120  per  hour.  It  is  customary,  in  building  ordinary  stables,  to 
d'-y-  1,600  cubic  feet  of  air  space  (over  twelve  hours'  supply)  for 
each  animal,  and  to  provide  means  of  admitting  fresh  air  without 
causing  drafts.  In  infirmary  stables  the  allowance  is  increased  to 
1,900  cubic  feet. 

Without  good  air  the  blood  is  imperfectly  purified,  the  vitality  of 
the  animal  is  lessened,  he  is  more  susceptible  to  disease,  and  will  suc- 
cumb more  easily  when  attacked;  consequently  horses  should  never 
be  kept  in  the  vicinity  of  a  marsh,  the  air  from  which  contains  an 
excess  of  carbonic  acid  gas  and  a  diminished  supply  of  the  necessary 
oxygen. 

5417—09 2 


16  THE    \K.\n     EORSE    IX    ACCIDENT    AND    DISEASE. 

(   \i;i:    OF   THE    [NJURED. 

If  the  horse  is  seriously  injured  and  stands  with  difficulty,  he  should 
be  placed  in  slings  (Plate  II)  to  partially  support  the  weighl  of  the 
body.  The  slings  must  be  properly  adjusted,  lilting  closely  behind 
the  elbows  in  such  a  manner  as  to  support  the  weight  of  the  body  on 
the  chest  and  not  on  the  abdomen.  This  position  is  maintained  by 
the  use  of  the  breast  piece  and  breeching,  which  prevent,  the  shifting 
of  the  sling.  A  single  stall,  having  a  level  floor,  free  from  bedding, 
is  more  suitable  than  one  allowing  more  motion  to  the  animal. 

If  the  horse  is  but  slightly  injured,  there  is  no  necessity  of  placing 
him  in  slings.  An  ordinary  stall  with  a  level  floor  is  all  that  is  re- 
quired. After  the  injury  has  been  dressed  he  should  be  allowed  to 
stand  without  being  disturbed.  If  very  lame,  and  movement  is 
painful,  the  more  quiet  he  is  kept  the  more  quickly  will  recovery 
take  place.  Absolute  rest  and  perfect  quietude  are  two  very  essential 
things,  and  when  secured  they  will  hasten  the  process  of  recovery  with- 
out inflicting  unnecessary  pain  upon  the  animal.  In  some  surgical 
cases  it  is  necessary  to  restrain  the  animal  so  that  he  can  not  injure 
himself  by  rubbing  or  biting  the  affected  parts.  This  can  be  accom- 
plished by  tying  up  the  head  or  by  the  application  of  side  lines. 
Bandages  may  be  applied  to  the  legs  of  animals  for  different  purposes: 
First,  to  give  support  to  the  blood  vessels  and  synovial  bursse;  sec- 
ond, to  dry  and  warm  the  legs;  third,  to  support  packs  used  in  apply- 
ing hot  and  cold  lotions;  and  fourth,  when  conditions  are  favorable, 
to  check  haemorrhages. 

WATER    SUPPLY. 

However  harmless  impure  water  may  have  been  to  animals  in  a  wild 
state,  the  more  we  subject  them  to  an  artificial  existence  the  more 
we  remove  them  from  the  immunity  they  may  have  possessed  against 
common  causes  of  disease  and  the  greater  liability  is  there  for  the 
development  of  diseases  which  originally  may  never  have  existed. 
In  other  words,  the  domesticated  animal  should  always  have  pure 
water;  when  the  vitality  is  further  reduced  by  sickness  the  necessity 
of  absolute  purity  is  even  more  imperative. 


(II  APT  Kit  III. 


ANATOMY. 

Anatomy  is  a  description  of  the  structures  thai  make,  up  the  body. 

THE    SKELETON. 
Plate  III.) 

The  skeleton  is  the  framework  for  the  support  of  the  softer  struc- 
tures, and  is  composed  of  216  bones  (exclusive  of  the  teeth  )  of  various 
sizes  and  forms. 

Flat  bones,  such  as  the  skull,  ribs,  and  scapula,  are  found  covering 
vital  organs;  long  bones  are  found  principally  in  the  extremities,  for 
the  support  of  the  body. 

The  spinal  column  is  composed  of  bones  of  very  irregular  shape, 
which  are  divided  into  five  groups  according  to  their  location,  and  are 
known  as  vertebra.  Commencing  at  the  back  of  the  head,  the  first 
seven  are  called  the  cervical  vertebras,  or  bones  of  the  neck;  of  these 
the  first  is  called  atlas,  the  second  axis;  the  next  eighteen  are  called 
the  dorsal  vertebrae,  forming  the  main  part  of  the  back;  the  next  six, 
the  lumbar  vertebrae,  form  the  loins;  the  croup  or  sacrum  is  com- 
posed of  five  bones,  which  in  the  adult  animal  are  united  together  as 
one  bone;  and  following  this  are  found  the  coccygeal  or  tail  bones, 
numbering  from  thirteen  to  twenty.  All  vertebras  have  irregular 
projections  of  varying  length,  called  spinous  processes;  these  are 
named,  according  to  location,  dorsal,  cervical,  etc.:  the  third  to  sixth 
dorsal  spinous  processes  (often  called  dorsal  spines)  are  very  long 
and  form  the  withers. 

The  ribs  are  eighteen  on  each  side,  attached  above  to  the  dorsal 
vertebra1.  The  first  eight  (true  or  lixed  ribs)  are  attached  below,  by 
cartilage,  to  the  sternum  or  breastbone:  the  remaining  ten  (false  or 
floating  ribs)  are  attached  by  cartilage  to  one  another  and  indirectly 
to  the  sternum:  they  form  the  walls  of  the  chest  and  serve  as  a  pro- 
tection for  the  heart,  Lungs,  and  Large  blood  vessels. 

17 


18 


I'lll.    AKMY     HOKSK    IN    ACCIDENT    AND    DISEASE. 


<3      QJ 


—       I 


b  ^ 


p    5 


.    ,_    -     ~  .t:   ~  —     .  —    ~    ~ 

j^i   Mo?   o   o   a  -9    o    S 

*  t  3  £     J°°|o"fl 


a  " 


_  ^  .S  .3  ■=■  as  ^  -fi 
E  i   2  .2  a  a  r  3  i5  „c   SB  *   a   = 


HNillO©«HMCO'* 


W 
GQ 

Ph  -j  6 

o  S  g 

W  -           £  g               § 

H  3       1  g          .   .  &         § 


^      £     to    o  Sfi 


h  ^^    .  o       _r  ° 


,3 

0> 

^ 

rP 

111 

— 

- 

o 

o 

= 

— 

iT 

oJ 

c3 

ftia  & 


Uh  5-rr       .3  3  a  «  d        <^  S  S  S  a   S 


~    o 


3  s  s      a  » 


f    = 
>  ■* 


Qj    c 

=  s 


=  r 
5  — 


a   a 

—   -   ~ 

n  43  -    —     -     =     •/     S     -     - 

-  -  =^.=^£---ux 

-  -  —  —  —    re..— 

~    8    f.        =    =    E    2  ~  1    3    * 
:•-    ~         S    z    e    -    -    z-  a  - 

|  =l  ;      *  °.  a?  S  S  f  1  9f 


K) 


i  -•  3  a  a  1  a  ■' 

l  -J.  -  -  -   7.  -  Z 


.'?-'■;-  -r    5    i    g    ~    3    S    S    I    -    , 
"  ^  <   <  '—   y.   _    /.    -     /——-/_—- 


ANATOMY.  19 

The   skull,    containing   cavities    (or   chambers),    is   composed   of 

irregularly  shaped  Hat  bones,  the  most  important  of  which  is  the 
cranium,  or  brainpan,  occupied  by  the  brain  and  communicating 
with  the  bony  canal  (containing  the  spinal  cord),  which  passes 
through  the  center  of  the  cervical,  dorsal,  lumbar,  sacral,  and  some- 
times the  first  two  or  three  coccygeal  vertebrae.  The  orbital  cavities 
(containing  the  eves)  communicate  with  the  brain  by  narrow  pas- 
sages, through  one  of  which  the  optic  nerrt   passes. 

On  each  side,  below  the  eve.  are  two  closed  cavities  known  as  the 
superior  (upper)  and  inferior  (lower)  maxillary  sinuses;  in  the  lower 
third  of  the  skull  arc1  found  the  nasal  chambers  extending  from  the 
nostrils  backward  to  the  pharynx,  and  separated  by  a  thin  partition 
of  bone  and  cartilage,  called  the  septum  nasi;  the  floor  of  these 
chambers  forms  the  roof  of  the  mouth.  From  the  orbital  cavities 
the  skull  gradually  becomes  narrower  and  terminates  a  short  distance 
below  the  nostrils  in  the  pn  maxilla,  which  contains  the  six  upper 
incisor  teeth;  these  six,  with  the  corresponding  teeth  in  the  lower 
jaw,  form  the  anterior  (front)  boundary  of  the  mouth,  which  extends 
back  t<>  the  pharynx.  On  the  upper  portion  of  the  back  of  the  mouth 
cavity  are  found  six  molar  or  grinder  teeth  on  each  side;  that  portion 
of  the  jaw  between  them  and  the  incisors  is  called  the  interdental 
space.  Situated  on  each  side  near  tile  incisor  teeth  in  tins  space  are 
found,  in  the  male,  and  rarely  in  the  female,  the  tushes  or  canine 
teeth. 

The  inferior  maxilla  or  lower  jaw  is  composed  of  two  segments 
firmly  united  in  front  and  spreading  backward  somewhat  in  the  form 
of  a  letter  A'.  Each  branch,  at  the  end,  turns  upward  and  is  united 
to  the  skull  proper  in  a  movable  joint.  The  branches  of  the  jaw 
include  a  space  appropriately  called  the  maxillary  space.  Located 
in  the  united  or  front  part  of  this  bone  are  the  inferior  incisors  and 
canine  teeth,  and,  in  the  branches,  the  inferior  molars,  which  corre- 
spond to  those  of  the  upper  jaw.  The  space  between  the  molars 
and  incisors  is  the  same  as  that  in  the  upper  jaw. 

The  front  leg  is  composed  of  the  following  bones,  named  in  order 
from  above  downward:  Scapula,  shoulder  blade;  humous,  bone  of 
the  arm;  radius,  bone  of  the  forearm,  and  ulna,  bone  of  the  elbow 
(radius  and  ulna  are  united  in  one  bone);  carpus,  knee  bones  (seven 
small  bones);  large  metacarpal,  cannon  'hone;  two  small  metacarpals, 
splint  bones  (the  three  metacarpal  hones  are  joined  together,  forming 
the  metacarpus);  two  sesamoids,  pulley  bone-;  os  suffraginis,  upper 
pastern  bone;  os  coronet,  lower  pastern  bone;  os  pedis,  coffin  bone, 
and  os  nacicularis,  shuttle  bone.  The  scapula  is  extended  by  means 
of  a  thin  plate  of  gristle,  called  the  "cartilage  of  prolongation  "  winch 
oilers  additional  attachment  for  the  muscles  of  the  body. 


20  THE    ARMY    EOBSE    IN    ACCIDENT    AND    DISEASE. 

The  pelvis  is  composed  of  two  segments.  In  each  segment  are 
three  united,  irregularly  shaped,  flat  bones,  namely,  ilium,  ischium, 
and  pubis  (haunch  bones).  The  ischium  and  pubis  bones  arc  also 
united  in  pairs,  forming  the  floor  of  the  pelvic  cavity  occupied  by 

the  bladder  and  rectum.  The  two  ilium  bones  or  branches  are 
triangular  in  shape.  The  outer  angle  in  each  case  is  the  point  of 
tin  hip.  The  two  inner  angles  are  close  to  each  other,  and  together 
form  the  point  of  the  croup.  .Just  below  this  point  each  branch  is 
at  I  ached  to  the  sacrum  by  ligaments.  That  portion  of  the  ilium 
extending  back  to  the  hip  joint  is  called  the  "shaft." 

The  hind  leg  is  composed  of  the  following  bones:  Femur,  thigh 
bone;  tibia,  leg  bone ;  fibula,  accessory  leg  bone;  patella,  stifle  bone: 
tarsus,  hock  (made  up  of  six  small  bones,  named  calcaneum,  astrag- 
alus, cuneiform  magnum,  medium  and  parvum,  and  cuboid) ;  largi 
metatarsal,  cannon  bone;  two  small  metatarsals,  splint  bones.  Below 
the  cannon,  the  bones  have  the  same  name  as  in  the  fore  leg. 

JOINTS. 

A  joint  is  a  movable  union  between  two  or  more  bones.  Covering 
the  adjacent  surfaces  in  the  joint  is  a  thin  and  very  smooth  layer 
of  a  peculiar  kind  of  cartilage  called  articular  cartilage.  A  lubricating 
fluid,  synovia,  joint  oil,  is  required  to  reduce  the  amount  of  friction ; 
this  fluid  is  secreted  or  formed  by  the  synovial  membrane  and  the 
latter  is  confined  and  protected  by  the  capsular  ligament  which  com- 
pletely surrounds  the  joint.  Outside  of  the  capsular  ligament  are 
binding  ligaments  holding  the  bones  in  position. 

The  joints  of  the  fore  leg  are  as  follows:  Shoulder  joint,  formed  by 
the  lower  end  of  the  scapula  and  the  head  of  the  humerus:  dhow 
joint,  by  the  radius,  ulna,  and  humerus;  ~knee-joint,  by  the  radius, 
seven  small  bones  (earpals),  and  the  upper  end  of  the  metacarpals; 
fetlock  joint,  by  the  large  cannon,  upper  pastern  bone,  and  the  two 
sesamoids;  pastern  joint,  by  the  upper  and  lower  pastern  bones; 
coffin  joint,    by  the  lower  pastern,  coffin  bone,  and  shuttle  bone. 

The  following  joints  make  up  the  articulation  of  the  hind  leg: 
Hip  joint,  formed  by  the  socket  of  the  pelvis  and  the  head  of  the 
femur;  stifle  joint,  by  the  lower  end  of  the  femur,  head  of  the  tibia, 
and  the  patella;  Jiock  joint,  by  the  lower  end  of  the  tibia,  six  small 
bones  (tarsals),  and  the  upper  ends  of  the  metatarsals.  The  fet- 
lock, pastern,  and  coffin  joints  correspond  to  those  of  the  fore  limb. 

LIGAMENTS. 

Ligaments  are,  generally  speaking,  strong  bands  of  white  fibrous 
inelastic  tissue.  Their  principal  use  is  to  firmly  bind  joints  together. 
thereby  preventing  vibration  and  diminishing  friction. 


ANATOMY.  21 

The  suspensory  ligament  should  be  carefully  studied  on  account 
of  (he  numerous  accidents  to  which  it  is  liable.  It  is  a  long, strong 
band  of  fibrous  tissue  originating  in  the  back  part  of  the  lower  bones 
of  the  knee  and  in  the  upper  part  of  the  cannon  hone;  it  occupies 
the  space  between  the  splint  bones  and  passes  down  immediately 
behind  the  cannon  bone,  lying  between  it  and  the  tendon  (sinew) 
of  the  flexor  pedis  perforans:  it  bifurcates  (divides  into  two)  oppo- 
site the  lower  third  of  the  cannon  bone  and  becomes  attached  to 
the  sesamoids,  whence  the  parts  pass  forward  and  downward,  joining 
the  tendon  of  the  extensor  pedis  just  above  the  pastern  joint.  It 
is  thin  and  comparatively  weak  near  the  knee,  but  as  it  approaches 
the  fetlock  joint  it  almost  equals  the  back  tendons  in  substance,  and 
its  size  and  wiriness  to  the  touch  may  be  taken  as  some  test  of  the 
power  of  any  particular  leg  to  resist  a  breakdown. 

The  suspensory  ligament  of  the  hind  leg  corresponds  in  every 
particular  to  that  of  the  fore  leg. 

The  calcaneo-cuboid  ligament  stretches  from  the  posterior  (back) 
border  of  the  calcaneum  to  the  posterior  part  of  the  cuboid,  ending 
on  the  head  of  the  external  (outer)  splint  bone.  A  sprain  of  this 
ligament  is  known  as  a  "curb.1' 

Capsular  ligaments,  as  we  haye  seen,  are  pouch-shaped,  are  found 
around  joints,  and  are  intended  to  protect  the  lubricating  apparatus 
inside. 

Some  ligaments  are  made  up  almost  entirely  of  yellow  tissue, 
which  is  elastic.  The  ligamentum  mtchse,  neck  ligament,  is  an  impor- 
tant example.  It  occupies  the  space  in  front  of  the  dorsal  spines, 
above  the  ceryical  vertebra1,  and  is  attached  to  the  top  of  the  skull. 
In  this  position  it  separates  the  neck  muscles  of  the  right  side  from 
those  of  the  left.  The  object  of  elasticity  in  this  ligament  is  to 
permit  of  great  freedom  in  the  motion  of  the  head,  although  sup- 
porting its  great  weight  in  proper  position. 

MUSCLES    AND    TENDONS. 
(Plate  IV 

The  muscles  are  divided  into  voluntary  and  involuntary  mus- 
cles; the  former  being  under  the  direct  control  of  the  will,  as,  for 
example,  the  muscles  of  the  neck,  legs,  tail,  etc. ;  and  the  latter  acting 
independently  of  the  animal's  will,  as,  for  example,  the  heart,  intes- 
tinal muscles,  etc. 

The  muscles  form  about  one-half  of  the  entire  weight  of  the  body. 
With  regard  to  their  form  they  are  divided  into  long,  wide,  and 
short.  Long  muscle-,  are  generally  found  in  the  limbs;  wide  mus- 
cles are  stretched  beneath  the  skin  or  around  the  great  cavities  of 
tin1  trunk,  and  short  muscles  are  found  chiefly  around  the  irregularly 
shaped  bones. 


22  CHE    \K.\lY    BORSE    IN    ACCIDENT   AND   DISEASE. 

Tendons  are  white,  round  or  flattened  cords  affixed  to  the  ex- 
tremities of  long  muscles,  attaching  them  to  other  structures,  but 
themselves  neither  stretching  nor  contracting. 

All  leg  muscles  are  long  muscles.  Extensors  are  those  that  have 
the  power  of  straightening  the  limb; flexors,  of  bending  the  limb. 

The  (xitnsor  pedis  is  the  principal  extensor  of  the  fore  leg;  it 
originates  at  the  lower  extremity  of  the  humerus,  and  its  fleshy  por- 
tion continues  to  the  lower  third  of  the  radius;  at  this  point  it  be- 
comes tendinous,  and,  passing  down  over  the  knee,  continues  along 
the  front  of  the  \v^  and  becomes  attached  to  the  upper  and  front 
part  of  the  os  pedis.     Action,  to  extend  the  leg. 

The  extensor  mffraqinis  has  its  origin  from  the  external  head  and 
outer  border  of  the  radius  and  from  the  side  of  the  ulna  ;  it  is  inserted 
(attached)  to  the  upper  and  front  part  of  the  os  suflraginis.  Action, 
to  extend  the  foot. 

The  extensor  metacarpi  magnus  has  its  origin  from  the  lower  and 
external  surface1  of  the  humerus,  passes  down  the  front  of  the  radius 
and  kneejoint,  and  is  attached  to  the  upper  end  of  the  large  meta- 
carpal bone.     Action,  to  extend  the  metacarpus. 

The  flexor  oracliii  has  its  origin  from  the  lower  end  of  the  scapula, 
near  the  shoulder  joint,  and  passes  down  in  front  of  that  joint  and 
the  humerus  and  becomes  attached  to  the  upper  front  part  of  the 
radius.     Action,  to  flex  the  elbow  joint  and  extend  the  shoulder. 

The  flexor  pedis  perforatus  originates  from  the  inner  and  lower  part 
of  the  humerus;  it  passes  down  the  back  part  of  the  leg,  becoming 
tendinous  just  above  the  carpus;  behind  the  pastern  it  bifurcates, 
forming  a  ring  for  the  passage  of  the  tendon  of  the  perforans  and 
becomes  attached  to  the  sides  of  the  os  corona?.  Action,  to  bend  or 
flex  the  knee,  fetlock,  and  pastern. 

The  flexor  pedis  perforans  originates  with  the  perforatus ;  its  fleshy 
portion  passes  down  and  is  attached  to  the  back  part  of  the  radius; 
its  tendinous  portion,  beginning  at  the  knee,  passes  down  the  leg 
between  the  cannon  bone  and  the  tendon  of  the  perforatus,  over  the 
back  of  the  fetlock,  through  the  arch  formed  by  the  division  of  the 
tendon  of  the  perforatus,  and  is  attached  to  the  under  surface  of  the 
os  pedis.     Action,  to  flex  the  knee  and  all  joints  below. 

The  extensor  pedis  of  the  hind  leg  originates  from  the  lower  and 
front  part  of  the  femur;  its  fleshy  portion  extends  downward  along 
the  front  surface  of  the  tibia  to  the  hock,  where  it  becomes  tendinous; 
passing  thence  down  the  front  of  the  leg  it  is  attached  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  extensor  pedis  of  the  front  leg.  Action,  to  extend  the 
leg  and  flex  the  hock. 

The  peroneus  has  its  origin  from  the  external  ligament  of  the  stifle 
and  from  the  outer  part  of  the  fibula,  and  is  attached  to  the  tendon 


.; 


ANATOMY. 


23 


■e  a  k 


00        X      ■-        X        DO 

v   s  e   o)   o   j 

—   ao    r    — i  —   - 


z 

jg 

p 

Z 

c 

— 

:     5 

x 

— 

s. 

H 

o 

*    2 

~ 

— 

~~ 

X 

— 

~.    X 

— 

'J 

Z 

— 

£  Ph 

■-  H 

xi 

cs 

o 

n    M 

H 

C  1 

— 

-r 

—    — 

cc 

« 

O 

a 

H 

~ 

H 

fe 

O 

^ 

x° 

P 

X 

fc 

5 

Z 

tr. 

o 

o 

a    d 

Q 

— 

6 

01 

ao 

c    o 

•-  ~o 

Q 

I 

m 

a 

z 

a 

■— 

-- 
i. 

C 
0 

o 

M 

_r. 

— 

93 
= 

13 

- 

g 

- 

QQ 

—  p 

5  $ 

°   ~ 
€  -5 

-  D 
P     ft 

< 

CM 
W 

— 
o 

| 

'53 

/. 

"S 

p 

z 

1*4 

S 

Si 

C 
/. 

c 

fa      Si 
X       X 

P     3 

i     :. 

o 

CO 

£^_:^^^;^^ 

& 

l*i 

-r 

CO 

•*    lO 

S 

i— I 

ri 

C  1 

<M    c3 

—        X 


p 

O 

-r 

•   p 

p   ^ 

o  -^ 

"O      X 

P  "3 


e.  p.  §>  e 


c  s 


it    s-     ;-    —     0 


-     -     :    ._     -     - 
******  m    —      - 


££     =r= 


.—    —    x    '-    —    —    -'-A 


24  THE   AH.MY    HORSE   IN   ACCIDENT    AND    DISEASE. 

of  the  extensor  pedis  a  short  distance  below  the  hock.  Action,  to 
assist  the  extensor  pedis. 

The  tendon  of  the  peroneus  is  cut  in  the  operation  for  string  halt. 

The  jlexor  metatarsi  is  divided  into  two  portions— a  muscular  and 

a  tendinous.  The  tendinous  part  is  a  strong  pearl-white  cord,  situ- 
ated between  the  muscular  portion  and  the  extensor  pedis.  It  com- 
mences at  the  lower  extremity  of  the  femur,  and  terminates  in  two 
branches — a  large  one  inserted  in  front  of  the  upper  extremity  of  the 
cannon  bone  and  a  small  one  deviating  outward  to  reach  the  front 
surface  of  the  cuboid  bone.  The  fleshy  portion  originates  on  the 
front  face  of  the  tibia  and  is  inserted  by  two  tendons,  one  in  the  head 
of  the  large  metatarsal  bone,  the  other  in  the  small  cuneiform  on  the 
inner  side  of  the  hock.     Action,  to  flex  the  hock. 

The  Jlexor  pedis  perforatus  of  the  hind  leg  originates  at  the  back 
and  lower  part  of  the  femur.  Its  fleshy  portion  extends  about 
halfway  down  the  tibia,  then  becomes  tendinous,  and  passes  over 
the  point  of  the  hock,  continues  down  the  back  of  the  leg,  and  is 
attached  in  the  same  manner  as  the  perforatus  of  the  front  leg. 
Action,  to  extend  the  hock  and  to  flex  the  fetlock  and  pastern. 

The  gastrocnemius  externus  has  a  double  origin  at  the  lower  and 
back  part  of  the  femur  and  is  attached  to  the  point  of  the  hock.  At 
the  back  part  of  the  leg  the  tendon  of  this  muscle  becomes  closely 
associated  with  the  tendon  of  the  flexor  pedis  perforatus,  the  two 
forming  the  tendon  of  Achilles,  or  hamstring. 

The  jlexor  pedis  perforans  of  the  fund  leg  originates  at  the  upper 
and  back  portion  of  the  tibia.  Above  the  hock  it  becomes  tendinous 
and  passing  down  over  the  inner  and  back  side  of  the  hock  is  at- 
tached to  the  os  pedis  in  the  same  manner  as  the  perforans  of  the 
front  limb.     Action,  to  extend  the  hock  and  to  flex  the  joints  below. 

Wide  muscles  are  attached  to  other  structures  by  broad  bands  of 
strong  white  tissue  instead  of  by  tendons. 

The  panniculus  carnosus  (fly  shaker)  is  a  wide  flat  muscle  situated 
on  the  inner  surface  of  the  skin  and  covering  most  of  the  neck,  sides 
of  the  chest,  and  belly.     Action,  to  shake  the  skin. 

The  principal  muscles  of  the  back,  loins,  and  haunches  are  the 
longissimus  dorsi,  gluteus  externus,  gluteus  maximus,  and  gluteus 
interims. 

The  longissimus  dorsi  is  situated  on  the  upper  part  of  the  back  and 
loins,  and  is  the  largest  and  most  powerful  muscle  in  the  body. 
occupying  the  space  on  either  side  of  the  dorsal  and  lumbar  spines. 
Is  broad  and  fleshy  at  its  origin  in  the  loins  and  becomes  narrower  as 
it  proceeds  forward.  It  is  attached  to  the  front  part  of  the  pelvis 
(ilium),  f iist  two  bones  of  the  sacrum,  all  of  the  lumbar  and  dorsal 
vertebra',  the  external  surface  of  the  last  fifteen  or  sixteen  ribs,  and 
to  the  last   three  or  four  cervical  vertebrae.     Action:   It   is  brought 


ANATOMY.  2  b 


.    S3     •     .     . 
j-   i-    —    i-   v: 


QQ 

■i. 

P 

P 

r* 

— 

<t 

o 

rt 

5 

< 
Pn 
Ph 

< 

£* 

^ 

DC 

Ti 

' ~ 

09 

> 

* 

_' 

o 

H 

tf 

— ■ 

JH 

P 

— 

5 

o 

CO 

"3 

C 

+3 

itl 

<! 

(h 

— 

X 

o 

- 

3 

aT 
3 
tr. 

X 

P 

— 

!P 

v. 
M 

■ — 

5 

3 
P 
— 

OQ 

3 

~, 

Tr 

T 

w 

/. 

Ph 

— 

— 

QQ 

O: 

o 

- 

-M 

w 

— 

0) 

-  .& 

a   — 

II 


y  2  a  x  -S    b 

d  if-  E?  >  be  ~ 

9  =  2  -  ■-     r. 

&  ■-  -  _;  ^  '- 


26    f  THE    AliMV    HORSE    IN    ACCEDENT    AND    DISEASE* 

powerfully  into  play  in  kicking  or  rearing;  it  elevates  the  bind  orfore 
quarters,  according  as  the  fore  or  hind  limbs  arc  on  the  ground. 
Acting  <>n  one  side  only,  it  bends  the  back  and  loins  laterally. 

(II Hi,  us  externus  is  a  V-shaped  muscle  situated  on  the  upper 
and  outer  part  of  the  haunch.  II  originates  on  the  fronl  part 
of  the  ilium  and  at  the  second  and  third  sacral  spines.  Inser- 
tion, to  the  upper  and  outer  pari  of  the  femur.  Action,  to  draw 
the  thigh  outward. 

Gluteus  maximus  is  a  very  large  muscle,  originating  in  the  lumbar 
region;  it  is  attached  to  t ho  ilium  and  sacrum  and  is  inserted  on 
the  upper  and  outer  portion  of  the  femur.  Action,  to  extend  the 
femur  on  the  pelvis,  and  when  the  posterior  limbs  an'  fixed,  to 
assist  in  rearing. 

Gluteus  internus  is  situated  underneath  the  gluteus  maximus 
and  above  the  hip  joint.  It  originates  from  the  shaft  (lower 
angle)  of  the  ilium  and  is  inserted  by  a  tendon  to  the  upper  part 
of  the  femur.  Action,  to  draw  the  leg  outward  and  rotate  it 
inward. 

THE    RESPIRATORY    SYSTEM. 

(Plate  V.) 

The  organs  of  respiration  are  the  nostrils,  nasal  chambers, 
pharynx,  larynx,  trachea,  bronchi,  bronchial  tubes,  and  air  cells. 
All  of  these  organs,  except  the  air  cells,  are  lined  with  a  soft  tissue 
called  mucous  membrane;  where  organs  open  to  the  external  surface 
the  mucous  membrane  and  the  skin  are  continuous.  The  nostrils 
are  two  oblong  openings  (right  and  left)  situated  in  the  front  part 
of  the  muzzle.  The  nasal  chambers  extend  from  the  nostrils  to  the 
pharynx  and  are  separated  from  each  other  by  the  cartilaginous 
septum  nasi;  each  chamber  is  divided  by  the  turbinated  bone  into 
three  passages,  all  lined  with  a  delicate  rose-colored  mucous 
membrane,  called  the  Schneiderian  membrane,  which  is  continuous 
with  the  skin  of  the  nostrils. 

The  pharynx  is  a  muscular,  membranous  cavity,  common  to 
the  digestive  and  respiratory  canals,  somewhat  cylindrical  in  form, 
and  extending  back  to  the  larynx  and  the  esophagus. 

The  larynx  (commonly  known  as  "Adam's  apple")  is  a  complex 
lnusculo-cartilaginoiis  box,  situated  in  the  back  part  of  the  maxillary 
space,  and  at  the  front  part  of  the  trachea  or  windpipe.  It  gives  pas- 
sage to  air  and  at  the  same  time  is  the  organ  of  voice.  The  front 
extremity  opens  into  the  pharynx  and  the  posterior  into  the  trachea; 
the  front  opening  is  guarded  by  a  valve  called  the  epiglottis  or  "pot- 
lid,"  which  closes  mechanically  in  the  act  of  swallowing  and  thus 
prevents  the  passage  of  food  or  water  into  the  trachea  and  lungs. 


ANATOMY.  27 

The  trachea,  or  windpipe,  is  a  cylindrical,  flexible  tube  con- 
sisting of  a  series  of  incomplete  cartilaginous  rings,  numbering 
from  forty  to  fifty,  according  to  the  length  of  the  neck.  It  succeeds 
the  larynx,  runs  down  the  neck,  enters  the  thorax  or  chest,  and 
terminates  at  the  base  of  the  heart  where  it  branches  into  the  right 
and  left  bronchi,  which  enter  the  lungs  and  subdivide  into  branches 
termed  bronchial  tubes.  These,  becoming  gradually  smaller  as  they 
divide,  finally  terminate  in  air  cells.  The  entire' ramification,  when 
isolated,  has  the  appearance  of  a  tree,  the  trachea  being  the  t  runk,  the 
bronchi  and  bronchial  tubes  the  branches,  and  the  air  cells  the 
leaves.  These  structures  are  accompanied  throughout  by  arteries, 
veins,  and  nerves. 

The  thorax,  or  chest,  is  formed  by  the  ribs,  sternum,  the  bodies  of 
the  dorsal  vertebra',  the  muscles  between  the  ribs  (intercostal),  and 
the  diaphragm.  It  contains  the  lungs  J  heart,  large  blood  vessels,  the 
trachea,  esophagus,  and  a  number  of  nerves.  The  thorax  is  lined  by 
two  serous  membranes,  the  light  and  left  pleura,  each  pleura  lining 
one-half  the  thorax  and  enveloping  the  structures  contained  therein. 
A  serous  membrane  is  a  thin  glistening  structure  and  lines  a  closed 
cavity. 

The  lungs,  the  essential  organs  of  respiration,  are  light,  spongy 
organs  of  a  conical  shape,  situated  in  the  thoracic  cavity.  (Healthy 
lungs  float  in  water.) 

The  diaj>hraam  or  midriff  is  the  muscular  partition  which  separates 
the  thorax  from  the  abdominal  en  "it;/  or  belly. 

DIGESTIVE    ORGANS. 

I  Plate  VI. 

The  digestive  organs  consist  of  the  mouth,  pharynx,  esophagus, 
stomach,  intestines,  and  onus,  all  lined  with  mucous  membrane. 
Together  they  form  the  alimentary  canal  through  which  the  alimen- 
tary matter  (food)  is  subjected  to  the  special  actions  which  adapt  ix 
to  the  purpose  of  nutrition. 

The  mouth  is  an  irregular  cavity,  containing  the  organs  of  taste 
and  the  instruments  of  mastication  (chewing  or  grinding").  It  is 
situated  between  the  jaws,  its  long  diameter  following  that  of  the 
head,  and  is  pierced  by  two  openings — the  anterior,  for  the  introduc- 
tion of  food,  and  the  posterior,  through  which  the  food  passes  into 
the  pharynx,  ft  is  bounded  in  front  by  the  lips  and  laterally  by  the 
checks:  the  roof  is  formed  by  the  hard  palate;  the  floor  is  occupied 
by  the  tongue,  while  the  rear  boundary  is  the  soft  palate.  Opening 
into  the  mouth  are  ducts  leading  from  the  salivary  glands:  the 
parotid,  submaxillary,  and  sublingual  glands.  The  mucous  mem- 
brane covers  the  whole  free  surface  of  the  mouth  and  its  accessories 


28  THE   ai;MV    EORSE    in    ACCIDENT   AND   DISEASE. 

except   the  teeth.      The  lips  are  the  organs  of  touch  as  well  as  of  pre- 

ln  ii  si  on  (picking  up).     The  soft  palate  Is  a  curtain  suspended  between 

the  mouth  and  the  pharynx,  attached  above  to  the  palatini  arch  (the 
hack  part    of  the  hard   palate);    the   lower  border  is  flee  and  rests  on 

the  floor  of  the  pharynx.  Owing  to  the  greal  size  of  this  curtain, 
the  horse  is  unable  to  breathe  through  his  mouth. 

The  tongue  is  a  movable  muscular  organ,  situated  on  the  floor  of 
the  mouth  between  the  branches  of  the  lower  jaw.  it  is  the  special 
organ  of  taste  and  at  the  same  time  assists  in  mastication. 

The  pharynx  has  been  previously  described. 

The  esophagus,  or  gullet,  is  a  muscular  tube  connecting  the  pharynx 
to  the  stomach. 

The  stomach  is  a  pear-shaped  organ  situated  in  the  abdominal 
cavity,  close  to  the  diaphragm.  Its  internal,  or  mucous,  coat  is 
divided  into  right  and  left  portions,  the  left  is  the  cuticular  portion 
and  is  continuous  with  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  esophagus, 
which  it  resembles  in  structure  and  appearance,  being  of  a  pale  white 
color.  The  right  portion,  the  villous,  or  true  digestive  coat,  is  reddish 
in  color,  soft,  very  vascular  (filled  with  blood  vessels)  and  velvety 
looking;   it  contains  the  peptic  glands  which  secrete  gastric  juice. 

The  capacity  of  the  stomach  of  the  horse  (from  3  to  'S\  gallons)  is 
small  in  proportion  to  his  size. 

The  intestines  are  divided  into  large  and  small.  The  small  intes- 
tines are  continuous  with  the  stomach,  rather  more  than  an  inch  in 
diameter  and  about  72  feet  in  length.  The  large  intestines,  measur- 
ing about  22  feet  in  length,  extend  from  the  termination  of  the  small 
intestines  to  the  anus,  and  may  be  regarded  as  consisting  of  four  parts, 
the  csecum,  great  colon,  floating  colon,  and  the  rectum. 

The  membranous  lining  of  the  intestines  is  covered  with  small  pro- 
jections called  villi,  which  absorb  the  nourishing  parts  of  the  food. 
The  villi  are  more  numerous  in  the  small  intesines  than  in  the  large. 

The  intestines  are  supported  throughout  their  entire  length  by 
strong  bands  of  fibrous  tissue  (the  mesentery)  extending  from  the 
backbone.     The  mesentery  is  a  part  of  the  peritoneum. 

The  anus  is  the  posterior  opening  of  the  alimentary  canal  and  lies 
below  the  root  of  the  tail.  It  forms  a  round  projection,  which 
becomes  less  prominent  with  age. 

The  liver  is  the  largest  secreting  organ  in  the  body,  weighing  from 
10  to  12  pounds.  It  is  situated  immediately  behind  the  diaphragm 
and  in  front  of  the  stomach.  The  liver  secretes  a  fluid,  called  bile  or 
gall,  which  is  emptied  directly  into  the  small  intestines,  as  the  horse  is 
not  provided  with  a  gall  bladder. 

The  pancreas  (sweetbread)  is  situated  behind  the  stomach  and  in 
from  of  the  kidneys.      Jt  is  of  reddish  cream  color,  and  weighs  about 


.  HE 


ANATOMY.  29 


T3 


a 

tf  «<  fti  pq  !-< 


CO    ■*    lO    «3    N 


OS 
P 

H 

-      ■=      £■ 

^  5  1 


0> 

= 

= 

■m 

z 

0 
ft 

a 

z 

— 

z 

ft 

3 

: 

EX 

V 

£ 

a 

i-T 

0 

— 

■~ 

<» 

60 

u 

as 

cS 

- 

> 

a 

a 

: 

3 

^ 

0 

w. 

E 

00  a  o  h  n 


a 

3 

i 

a 

^3 

_= 

>>.a 

,fl 

c<J 

= 

- 

d 

ft 
7 

_ 

- 

r 

3  ft  w 

— 

/- 

X 

r-i   01   «   rri   10  «o 


30  THE   Ai;.\l\     HOBSE    IN    ACCIDENT   AND    DISEASE. 

17  ounces,  [ts  function  is  to  secrete  pancreatic  fluid,  which  is  poured 
into  the  small  intestine. 

The  splet  n  is  situated  on  the  left  side  of  the  stomach,  it  is  pointed 
at  the  lower  end  and  gradually  widens  as  it  extends  up  to  the  region 
of  the  left  kidney.  The  spleen  is  of  a  reddish-gray  color  and  in  the 
healthy  horse  weighs  from  2  to  4  pounds.  In  disease,  however,  it 
may  reach  an  enormous  size. 

The  function  of  the  spleen  is  not  positively  known,  hut  it  is  believed 
that  this  organ  acts  as  a  storehouse  for  the  supply  of  blood  to  the 
stomach  during  digestion  and  that  it  effects  some  change  in  the 
blood,  many  authorities  claiming  that  it  forms  the  white  blood  cor- 
puscles.     (See  "Blood.") 

The  abdominal  cavity  is  a  large,  somewhat  oval  cavity,  bounded 
above  by  the  muscles  of  the  back,  below  by  the  abdominal  muscles, 
and  in  front  by  the  diaphragm;  behind  it  is  continuous  with  the 
pelvic  cavity.  The  cavity  is  lined  throughout  by  a  serous  membrane 
called  the  peritoneum. 

PHYSIOLOGY    OF   DIGESTION. 

By  physiology  is  meant  a  description  of  the  functions  or  uses  of 
certain  structures.  The  physiology  of  digestion  describes  the  func- 
tions of  parts  of  the  digestive  apparatus. 

Food,  as  it  passes  through  the  digestive  or  alimentary  canal,  is  sub- 
jected to  a  series  of  mechanical  and  chemical  agencies  by  which  it  is, 
in  greater  or  less  part,  digested  and  worked  up  to  a  condition  in 
which  it  can  be  absorbed  by  the  appropriate  vessels,  and,  while  this 
portion  is  taken  up  by  the  circulation,  the  effete  (worthless)  remain- 
der passes  on  and  is  discharged. 

The  food  is  taken  into  the  mouth  by  the  lips  (prehension),  where 
it  is  ground  up  {mastication),  and  is  mixed  with  saliva.  Saliva, 
secreted  by  the  salivary  glands  in  different  parts  of  the  l\ead,  acts 
chemically  upon  the  starchy  components  (parts)  of  the  food  and  con 
verts  them  into  sugar,  which  is  more  readily  absorbed.  This  step  is 
called  insalivation. 

The  next  step,  deglutition  or  swallowing,  is  mechanically  per- 
formed by  the  tongue,  pharynx,  and  esophagus. 

When  the  food  reaches  the  stomach  it  is  subjected  to  the  next 
step,  maceration,  a  mechanical  rolling,  mixing,  and  soaking  with  the 
gastric  juice.  During  maceration  the  gastric  juice  acts  chemically 
upon  other  components  (nitrogenous  parts),  rendering  them  absorb- 
able. Food  in  the  condition  in  which  it  leaves  the  stomach  is  called 
cliyme. 

In  the  small  intestines  the  villi  take  up  the  absorbable  parts 
already    prepared,   and  the  remaining  nourishing  parts  are  inime- 


ANATOMY.  31 

diately  subjected  to  the  chemical  action  of  the  bile  and  pancreatic 
fluid.  Chyme,  acted  upon  by  these  juices,  becomes  chyle.  Passing 
through  the  great  length  of  the  small  intestines,  nearly  all  of  the 
nourishing  parts  of  the  chyle  are  absorbed,  and  the  residue  (remain- 
der) enters  the  caecum,  which  is  the  water  reservoir.  (Water  re- 
mains in  the  stomach  of  the  horse  only  a  short  time  and  then  passes 
promptly  through  the  small  intestines  into  the  caecum.) 

The  residue,  soaked  in  water,  gives  up,  in  its  passage  through 
to  the  rectum,  the  small  amount  of  nutritive  matter  that  has  not  pre- 
viously been  absorbed.  By  means  of  muscular  cross  ridges  in  the 
floating  colon  the  effete  material  is  mechanically  molded  into  pellets 
of  dung,  which  are  stored  in  the  rectum,  whence  they  are  ejected,  at 
intervals,  through  the  anus.     The  ejection  is  called  defecation. 

URINARY    SYSTEM. 
(Plate  VI.) 

The  organs  of  this  system  secrete  effete  material  in  the  form 
of  a  watery  fluid,  called  urine,  and  expel  it  from  the  body  (urination). 
They  are  the  kidneys,  ureters,  bladder,  and  urethra,  all  lined  with 
mucous  membrane. 

The  Jcidneys  are  two  in  number,  right  and  left,  situated  on  either 
side  of  the  spine,  immediately  below  the  lumbar  vertebra?.  Their 
action  is  to  secrete  the  urine  from  the  blood  by  a  process  of  filtering. 
Each  kidney  has  a  tube  or  duct,  called  the  ureter,  which  carries  the 
urine  to  the  storage  reservoir,  the  bladder.  This  muscular  organ,  by 
contraction,  discharges  the  urine,  at  intervals,  through  a  tube  called 
the  urethra,  which  extends  to  the  head  of  the  penis. 

The  normal  amount  of  urine  secreted  in  twenty-four  hours  and 
expelled  through  the  penis  varies  from  3  to  6  quarts.  The  color 
in  health  is  yellowish. 

CIRCULATION. 

I  Plate  VII.) 

The  organs  which  convey  the  blood  throughout  the  body  are 
the  heart,  arteries,  capillaries,  and  veins. 

The  heart  is  a  hollow  organ,  made  up  of  involuntary  muscles,  and 
inclosed  in  a  serous  sac  culled  pericardium;  it  is  situated  between  the 
lungs,  in  the  thoracic  cavity,  and  averages  about  6£  pounds  in  weight. 
It  is  divided  into  two  parts,  right  and  left,  separated  by  a  muscular 
wall.  Each  part  contains  two  cavities,  one  above  the  other,  the 
upper  called  the  auriclt  and  the  lower  the  ventricle.  The  cavities  are 
connected  by  openings,  which  are  guarded  by  valves  to  prevent  a 
back  flow  of  the  blood. 
5417—09 3 


32  THE  ARMY   HORSE   IN   ACCIDENT  AND   DISEASE. 

Arteries  are  hollow  structures  or  tubes,  conveying  the  blood  away 
from  the  heart,  and  veins  are  similar  structures,  bringing  it  back  to 
the  heart.  The  walls  of  the  tubes  are  thicker  in  arteries  than  in 
veins.  Veins  have  valves;  arteries  have  none.  Veins  as  well  as 
arteries  branch  off  and  diminish  in  size  as  they  extend  from  the 
heart. 

The  smallest  arteries  are  connected  with  the  smallest  veins  by 
minute  vessels  called  capillaries,  which  are  to  be  found  in  the  tissue 
throughout  the  body.  They  are  too  small  to  be  seen  with  the 
naked  eye. 

Blood. 

The  blood  is  a  fluid  which  is  the  medium  by  which  nutritive  mate- 
rial is  conveyed  to  all  tissues  of  the  body.  It  is  an  opaque,  thickish, 
clammy  fluid,  with  a  peculiar  odor  and  sickly,  saline  (salty)  taste. 
Its  color  varies  in  different  parts  of  the  same  animal,  that  in  the 
arteries  being  a  bright  red  or  scarlet,  while  that  in  the  veins  is  a  dark 
purple. 

Blood  is  composed  of  red  blood  corpuscles,  or  cells,  and  white 
blood  corpuscles,  floating  in  a  watery  liquid  called  serum,  which 
contains  the  nutrient  material  absorbed  by  digestion,  and  certain 
salts. 

The  red  cells  convey  the  oxygen,  and  their  presence  in  countless 
numbers  gives  the  bright-red  color  to  the  fluid.  The  white  cor- 
puscles act  as  a  protection  to  all  parts  of  the  body  in  case  of  disease 
or  injury;  they  assist  in  the  repair  of  injured  tissue  and  destroy  or 
check  invading  germs.  Blood  cells  can  be  seen  only  with  the  aid 
of  the  microscope. 

Circuit  of  the  blood. 

The  heart,  from  the  action  of  its  involuntary  muscles,  may  be 
likened  to  a  force  pump.  The  blood  from  the  veins,  venous  or 
impure  blood,  entering  the  right  auricle  of  the  heart,  is  pumped 
into  the  right  ventricle  and  thence  through  the  pulmonary 
artery  (lung  artery)  into  the  lungs. 

In  the  lungs  the  pulmonary  artery  branches  into  small  arteries 
and  then  into  capillaries  which  surround  the  air  cells.  Here  the 
blood  gives  off  carbonic  acid  gas  and  receives  its  purifying  supply  of 
oxygen.  The  purified  blood  passes  from  the  capillaries  into  the 
small  veins,  which  unite  in  the  pulmonary  veins  leading  back  to  the 
left  auricle. 

The  arterial,  pure,  or  bright-red  blood  is  then  pumped  into  the  left 
ventricle  and  thence  into  the  arteries,  small  arteries,  and  capillaries. 
Tn  these  last  vessels  it  gives  up  the  oxygen  supply  to  the  tissues  and 
receives   the   impure   carbonic   acid   gas,   which   causes   it    to   change 


o    = 


ANATOMY.  33 


7^ 

si 

- 

r. 
— 

- 
- 

— 

is 

d 

= 

r* 

"3 

H 

•- 

■— 

3 

X 

O 

> 

>• 
— 

— 
■1 

p 

- 

"~ 

r. 

03 

- 

;. 

i 

5 

"7 

03" 

— 

:. 

" 

- 

:: 

X 

- 

Ph 

W 

M 

h 

Ph 

--, 

r* 

Hj 

<5 

/. 

- 

2 

- 

t 

■~ 

H 

n 

X 

<J 

E 

s 

« 

5 

.  ~ 

< 

,_^ 

/. 

E 

Ph 

_• 

s 

X 

Ph 

< 

> 

— 

I 

X 

>H 

«s 

— 

T 

^ 

Ph 

O 
H 

< 
- 

C 

a 

- 

Si 

- 

>> 

- 

— 

S-c 

— 

.2 

m 

T 

-/ 

- 
a> 

— 
"x 

1 

Ph 

:— 

£ 

— 

— 

^5 

~- 

- 

- 

I 

;_ 

5 

^ 

c 

0 

~. 

pj 

rz. 

p 

2 

a 

a 

■A 

T 

u 

00 

■— 

■— 

w 

- 

S 

~ 

£ 

- 

Ph 

M 

— 

IC 

- 

t^ 

00 

r. 

»    .  ,2    . 


b    'C 


-  -  ■-    z    Z    -         -    t- 

.-  P     -     ~    —   "S      •  • ~    zi 

"  -    =_-.-    --_; 

-''-^-■'I^H 

j=  _  _  bp  >.  >.  £  g  -3 

=  -  -  _  = 

t-  9h      t-      C3      p 

B  S    -  —    s    ~    =    H  ~ 

w  —     ^  i  -  ■:  j 

.       .        .     B 


34  THE    Ali.MY     EOBSE    IN   ACCIDENT   AND   DISEASE. 

color.  The  dark  impure  blood  is  then  collected  through  the  small 
veins  into  the  larger  veins  and  thence  into  the  righl  auricle  from 
which  it  started.  This  round  or  circuit,  which  is  constantly  going 
on,  gives  rise  to  1  lie  name  circulation. 

It  has  been  stated  that  arteries  convey  the  Mood  away  from 
the  heart  and  that  veins  return  it.  In  supplying  the  body,  arteries 
carry  pure  blood  and  veins  carry  impure  blood.  'When,  however, 
the  impure  blood  is  sent  to  the  lungs  for  purification,  it  is  conveyed 
in  an  artery  and  the  pure  blood  returns  in  a,  vein.  These  twoirrt porta  id 
exceptions  must  be  carefully  noted. 

Arterial  rum ification. 

The  large  artery  given  off  from  the  left  ventricle  of  the  heart 
is  the  common  aorta,  which  passes  upward  and  forward  for  2  or  3 
inches  and  divides  into  the  anterior  aorta,  and  the  posterior  aorta, 
supplying,  respectively,  the  fore  and  hind  portions  of  the  body. 

The  anterior  aorta  is  very  short  (1  or  2  inches),  passes  upward  and 
forward  under  the  trachea  and  between  the  lungs,  and  divides  into 
the  right  and  left  brachial  arteries,  each  supplying  blood  to  one  of  the 
fore  limbs  and  its  neighboring  muscles. 

The  rigid  brachial  artery  gives  off  a  large  branch,  called  the  com- 
mon carotid.  There  is  no  corresponding  branch  of  the  left  brachial. 
The  common  carotid  is  short  and  immediately  divides  into  two 
branches,  right  and  left  carotids,  which  pass  up  the  neck,  at  first 
under  the  trachea  and  then  on  either  side;  they  follow  the  trachea 
to  the  throat,  where  they  divide  into  branches,  supplying  the  head. 

The  brachial  arteries  continue  toward  the  front  part  of  the  thorax, 
winding  around  the  first  ribs,  and  divide  into  branches,  supplying  the 
fore  limbs.  The  main  branch  of  each  is  here  named  the  humeral 
artery. 

The  humeral  artery  descends  along  the  inner  side  of  the  humerus, 
and  just  above  the  elbow  joint  divides  into  the  anterior  and  posterior 
radial  <irf<  ries. 

The  anterior  radial  <V->c^m\^  over  the  front  surface  of  the  elbow 
joint,  passes  down  in  front  of  the  radius,  and  approaches  the  knee 
below  the  extensor  pedis  muscle,  where  it  divides  into  numerous 
branches,  supplying  blood  to  the  surrounding  tissues.  The  }><>st<  rim- 
radial  is  a  continuation  of  the  humeral  artery,  passing  down  the  inner 
side  of  the  fore  leg,  inclining  back  and  dividing  at  the  lower  end  of 
the  radius  into  the  large  and  small  metacarpal  arteries. 

The  small  metacarpal  passes  outward  from  the  inner  and  back  part 
of  the  knee  and,  running  downward,  supplies  nourishment  to  the 
surrounding  tissues.  The  largi  metacarpal  is  a  continuation  of  the 
posterior  radial.  It  runs  down  the  back  of  the  knee,  in  company 
with    the   flexor   tendon;  above    the   fetlock   it    passes   between   the 


ANATOMY.  35 

tendon  and  the  suspensory  ligament,  dividing  into  the  external  and 
internal  digital  arteries,  which  supply  the  foot. 

The  study  of  the  digital  arteries  will  be  taken  up  later,  when  the 
student  has  a  more  extended  knowledge  of  the  bones  and  of  the 
elastic  and  sensitive  structures  of  the  foot. 

We  will  now  return  to  the  posterior  aorta.  The  posterior  aorta  is 
larger  and  longer  than  the  anterior.  It  begins  at  about  the  level  of 
the  fourth  dorsal  vertebra,  passes  upward  and  backward,  and  readies 
the  left  side  of  the  spine  just  below  the  sixtli  or  seventh  dorsal  verte- 
bra. It  then  passes  straight  back  into  the  abdominal  cavity  and 
terminates  in  the  lumbar  region  below  the.  last  lumbar  vertebra. 
During  its  passage  to  this  point  it  gives  off  branches  to  the  muscles 
of  the  ribs,  to  the  lungs  for  their  nourishment,  to  the  abdominal 
organs,  and  to  the  muscles  of  the  loins.  Below  the  last  lumbar 
vertebra  it  divides  into  four  branches,  the  right  and  lift  (-.eternal  and 
internal  iliacs,  which  supply  blood  to  the  hind  extremities. 

The  internal  iliacs  are  short  thick  trunks  which  soon  break  up  into 
several  branches  to  the  muscles  of  the  hind  quarters.  The  external 
iliacs,  with  their  continuations,  are  the  main  arteries  of  the  hind  legs. 
Bach,  as  previously  stated,  begins  below  the  last  lumbar  vertebra, 
curves  obliquely  outward  and  downward,  giving  off  branches,  and, 
near  the  head  of  the  femur,  receives  the  name  of  femoral  artery. 

The  femoral  artery  is  the  artery  of  the  thigh.  Just  above  the  back 
of  the  stifle  joint  it  divides  into  two  branches,  the  anterior  and  pos- 
terior tibial,  the  latter  supplying  the  back  part  of  the  gaskin  and  hock 
with  nourishment,  while  the  former  winds  forward  between  the  tibia 
and  fibula  to  the  fore  part  of  the  leg,  gaining  it  midway  between  the 
stifle  and  the  hock.  At  the  hock  it  passes  obliquely  outward,  cross- 
ing the  joint,  and  becomes  the  great  metatarsal  artery  at  the  upper  and 
outer  part  of  the  metatarsus.  The  great  metatarsal  passes  under  the 
small  splint  bone  and  gains  the  back  part  of  the  cannon,  then,  passing 
down  the  leg,  it  divides  just  below  the  fork  of  the  suspensory  ligament 
into  two  branches,  the  external  and  internal  digitals,  which  will  be 
studied  later. 

The  involuntary  muscles  of  the  heart  receive  their  blood  supply 
from  two  small  arteries,  rigid  ami  left  coronary,  which  branch  off'  at 
the  beginning  of  the  common  aorta. 

1  '<  ins. 

Veins  are  usually  found  accompanying  the  arteries  of  the  body  and 
bearing  similar  names;  there  are  several  important  exceptions, 
three  of  which  will  be  here  noted,  namely,  the  anterior  vena  cam, 
jugular,  and  posterior  vena  cava. 

The  anterior  vena  cava  is  the  large,  short  vein,  formed  by  numerous 
branches,  returning  the  blood  from  the  head,  the  neck,  the  fore  leg, 


36  THE    AliMY    HORSE    [N    ACCIM.NT    AND   DISEASE. 

and  pari  of  the  chest.  It  is  located  in  the  Trout  part  of  the  thorax, 
below  the  trachea,  and  between  the  right  and  left  pleurae,  and  empties 
into  the  righl  auricle. 

The  jugular  veins  (righl  and  left)  are  the  largest  branches  of  the 
anterior  vena  cava  and  collect  the  blood  from  the  head  and  neighbor- 
ing parts.  Just  below  and  back  of  the  lower  jaw  they  approach  the 
carotid  arteries  and  run  down  the  neck  in  their  company.  Each 
jugular  is  outside  of  the  corresponding  carotid  and  the  two  are  sepa- 
rated by  a  thin  muscle.  The  jugular  veins  in  their  descent  follow 
grooves  at  the  side  of  the  neck  (jugular  furrows),  and  at  first  are 
close  to  the  surface  and  easily  felt;  they  soon  take  a  deeper  course, 
running  beneath  the  pannieulus  earnosus  muscle.  They  enter  the 
front  part  of  the  thorax,  where  they  empty  into  the  anterior  vena 
cava  just  in  front  of  the  heart. 

The  posterior  vena  cava  is  the  main  vein  returning  the  blood  from 
the  hind  parts  and  from  the  abdominal  and  pelvic  organs.  It  corre- 
sponds to  the  posterior  aorta,  which,  as  has  been  seen,  is  the  main 
artery  carrying  the  blood  to  these  parts.  This  vein  is  formed  at  the 
front  part  of  the  pelvis  and  runs  forward  under  the  lumbar  vertebra, 
accompanying  the  posterior  aorta,  which  is  at  its  left.  When  it 
reaches  the  upper  border  of  the  liver  it  inclines  downward  and  passes 
through  a  notch  or  fissure  of  that  organ.  Thence  it  passes  through 
the  diaphragm  into  the  thoracic  cavity;  here  it  follows  a  groove  on 
the  upper  surface  of  the  right  lung  and  then  enters  the  right  auricle 
of  the  heart. 

The  important  veins  of  the  foot  will  be  discussed  later. 

ANATOMY    AND    PHYSIOLOGY    OF    THE    LYMPHATIC    SYSTEM. 

The  lymphatic  or  absorbent  system  resembles  the  system  of  blood 
veins  with  which  it  is  connected.  The  main  part  of  the  system  col- 
lects surplus  lymph  (to  be  described  later)  and  returns  it  to  the  blood; 
a  smaller  part  has  the  same  function,  but,  in  addition,  absorbs  and 
collects  chyle  and  adds  it  to  the  blood. 

When  the  blood  in  its  circuit  reaches  the  capillaries  the  serum 
oozes  through  their  thin  walls  into  the  minute  spaces  in  the  surround- 
ing tissues  and  there  receives  the  name  of  lymph.  This  colorless 
fluid  bathes  and  nourishes  the  tissues  and  takes  up  worn-out  material. 
The  spaces  in  the  tissues  assemble  into  minute,  dedicate,  and  trans- 
parent vessels  (lymphatics),  which  are  remarkable  for  their  knotted 
appearance,  due  to  numerous  valves.  The  vessels  join  and  increase 
in  size,  like  veins,  and  through  them  (lows  the  surplus  lymph  with 
its  collected  waste  material. 

The  vessels  of  the  right  fore  extremity,  the  right  side  of  the  head, 
neck,  and  thorax,  form  tubes  uniting  in  a  main  trunk,  called  the 
right  lymphatic  vein,  which  leads  into  the  anterior  vena  cava;    the 


ANATOMY.  37 

vessels  from  the  remainder  of  the  body  unite  in  a  trunk  called  the 
thoracic  duct,  which  begins  in  the  lumbar  region,  passes  forward 
beneath  the  lumbar  and  dorsal  vertebrae,  and  empties  into  the  anterior 
vena  cava  just  in  front  of  the  heart. 

Each  of  the  villi  of  the  intestines  contains  a  minute  vessel  called 
a  lacteal,  which  absorbs  chyle  and  receives  its  name  from  the  lacteal 
or  milky  appearance  of  that  fluid.  These  vesesls  of  the  smaller  lym- 
phatic system  unite  and  form  larger  tubes  which  empty  into  the 
recejrtaculum  chyli  (chyle  reservoir),  which  is  a  part  of  the  thoracic 
duct  of  the  larger  system. 

It  will  thus  be  seen  that  the  lymph  with  its  waste  material  and 
the  chyle  with  its  nutrient  material  are  mixed  and  poured  into  the 
impure  blood.  The  lymph  and  chyle  are  taken  up  into  the  serum 
and  the  waste  material  is  thrown  off  from  the  circulating  blood  by 
the  lungs,  skin,  and  kidneys. 

Lymph,  therefore,  makes  a  circuit  very  much  as  blood  does. 

To  simplify  the  explanation  of  the  system,  the  lymphatic  glands 
have  not  been  mentioned. 

Glands  are  organs,  the  function  of  which  is  to  separate  certain 
substances  from  the  blood,  which  are  either  to  be  used  in  the  animal's 
system  or  to  be  thrown  off  as  waste  material. 

The  lymphatic  glands  are  so  placed  that  the  lymphatic  vessels 
pass  through  them  in  their  course  toward  the  main  trunks.  These 
glands  act  as  niters  and  remove  any  infective  material  from  the 
lymph  and  also  supply  lymph  corpuscles,  which  are  identical  with 
the  white  corpuscles  of  the  blood. 

When  the  glands  are  situated  near  diseased  structures,  an  amount 
of  infected  material  lodges  in  the  glands,  greater  than  can  be  over- 
come by  the  lymph  corpuscles,  and,  in  consequence,  inflammation 
and  swelling  of  the  glands  result. 

ANATOMY    OF   THE    NERVOUS    SYSTEM. 

A  nerve  consists  of"  a  bundle  of  tubular  fibers,  held  together  by 
dense  connective  tissue;  the  nerve  fibers  form  a  conducting  appara- 
tus, to  convey  impulses  of  sensation  and  to  transmit  impulses  of 
motion. 

The  nervous  system  is  divided  into  two  minor  systems,  the  cerebro- 
spinal,  which  is  to  a  considerable  extent  influenced  by  the  will  of 
the  animal,  and  the  sympathetic,  which  is  not  directly  influenced  by 
the  will. 

In  the  first  the  center  is  made  up  of  two  portions,  the  brain  and 
the  spinal  cord. 

The  brain  is  situated  in  the  cranial  cavity;  the  spinal  cord  is 
elongated  and  continuous  with  the  brain  and  is  situated  in  the  canal 
of  the  vertebral  column. 


38 


[111.    ARMY    HORSE   IN   ACCIDENT  AND   DISEASE. 


The  communicating  portion  of  this  system  consists  of  the  cerebro- 
spinal nerves,  which  leave  the  brain  and  spinal  cord  in  symmetrica] 
pairs,  and  are  distributed  to  the  voluntary  muscles,  to  the  organs  of 
common  sensation,  and  to  those  of  special  sense. 

The  sympathetic  system  consists  of  a  double  chain  of  (/<in<//iti 
(small  brains),  extending  from  the  head  to  the  coccyx,  one  chain 
along  each  side  of  the  spine,  and  the  two  chains  connected  by  nerve 
cords.  The  ganglia  are  also  connected  to  branches  of  the  cerebro- 
spinal nerves,  thus  uniting  the  two  systems.  The  nerves  of  the  sym- 
pathetic system  are  distributed  to  the  involuntary  muscles,  mucous 
membranes,  internal  organs,  and  blood  vessels. 


ANATOMY    OF    THE    EYE. 

(Plate  VIII.) 

The  eye  is  the  organ  of  sight  and  is  situated  in  the  orbital  cavity. 
It  is  spherical  in  shape  and  is  filled  with  fluid.     The  front  portion, 

PLATE   VIII. 


Section  of  the  eye. 

c,  Cornea;  e,  eyelids;  /,  fluid;  ;',  iris;  1,  crystalline  lens;  o,  optic  nerve;  p,  pupil;  r,  retina. 

called  the  cornea,  is  perfectly  clear  and  admits  the  light  to  the  back 
part  of  the  eye,  where  it  strikes  the  retina,  an  expansion  of  the  optic 
nerve;  through  this  nerve  impressions  are  conveyed  to  the  brain. 
The  colored  portion  or  iris,  situated  behind  the  cornea,  acts  as  a  cur- 
tain, regulating  the  amount  of  light  admitted  through  the  central 
opening,  which  is  called  the  pupil.  The  crystalline  L  us  is  a  small 
transparent  body  situated  immediately  behind  the  pupil:  it  is  thick 
in  the  center  and  tapers  toward  the  edges.  Its  function  is  to  draw 
the  rays  of  light  to  a  focus  on  the  retina.  When  the  lens  is  diseased 
and  no  light  can  pass  through,  the  animal  is  said  to  have  a  cataract. 
The  eyelids  are  two  movable  curtains,  superior  and  inferior,  which 
protect  the  eye.  Themembrana  nictitans,  or  accessory  eyelid  (haw  , 
is  situated  near  the  inner  angle  between  the  lids  and  the  eyeball. 


ANATOMY.  39 

This  membrane  acts  like  a  finger  in  the  removal  of  foreign  bodies 
from  the  eve.  The  conjunctiva  is  a  continuous  mucous  membrane 
covering  the  cornea  and  haw  and  lining  the  eyelids. 

The  fluid  between  the  lens  and  the  cornea  (called  "aqueous")  is 
watery,  while  that  between  the  lens  and  the  retina  (called  "vitreous") 
is  thicker  and  like  the  white  of  a  raw  egg. 

The  outer  covering  (seen  when  the  animal  shows  the  white  of  the 
eye)  is  a  fibrous  tissue  called  the  sclerotic  coat.  Between  it  and  the 
retina,  is  a  delicate,  dark  colored  tissue  containing  the  blood  vessels 
and  known  as  the  choroid  coot. 

ANATOMY    OF  THE    SKIX. 

The  skin  consists  primarily  of  two  parts:  The  outer,  nonvascular 
layer,  called  the  cuticle  or  epidermis,  and  the  deep  vascular  layer, 
called  the  corium,  dermis,  or  true  skin. 

The  epidermis  is  a  scaly  covering.  The  true  skin  or  dermis  lies 
immediately  under  the  epidermis,  is  much  thicker,  and  contains  the 
roots  of  the  hair,  the  sweat  glands,  and  the  sebaceous  glands. 

Sweat  glands-are  simple  tubes  extending  from  the  deeper  layers  of 
the  skin  to  the  surface  of  the  body  and  pouring  out  perspiration, 
which  carries  with  it  certain  waste  materials  from  the  system.  The 
evaporation  of  sweat  cools  the  body  and  assists  in  regulating  its  tem- 
perature. 

Sebaceous  glands  secrete  an  oily  fluid.  On  parts  of  the  skin  which 
are  subjected  to  much  friction  these  glands  pour  their  oil  directly 
upon  the  outer  surface,  as  in  the  sheath,  the  back  of  the  pastern 
joints,  etc.  Usually,  however,  the  glands  open  into  the  hair  follicles 
or  sacs,  and  the  oily  secretion  gives  gloss  to  the  hair,  prevents  it 
becoming  dry  and  brittle,  and  keeps  the  surrounding  skin  soft  and 
supple. 

ANATOMY    AND    PHYSIOLOGY    OF   THE    FOOT. 

(Plate  IX.) 

The  horse's  foot  is  composed  of  three  parts,  viz:  The  bony  frame- 
work or  skeleton,  completed  by  certain  elastic  structures  of  cartilage 
and  fat;  the  layer  of  highly  sensitive  flesh  (quick),  which  covers  the 
framework:  and  the  box  or  case  of  horn,  called  the  hoof,  which 
incloses  and  protects  the  above-mentioned  structures. 

Bones  of  tin  foot. 

The  bones  of  the  pastern  region  and  foot  form  a  column  extending 
downward  from  the  fetlock  into  the  hoof,  and,  as  previously  stated, 
are  named  as  follows:  Os  suffraginis  (long  pastern  bone),  os  coronse 
(short  pastern  bone),  os  pedis  (coffin  bone),  and  os  navicvlaris  (-hut tic 
bone). 


40 


1111.   ARMY    110KSE    IN    ACCIDENT   AND   DISEASE. 


,2  S 

o  .;  =s  ^  • 

hi                              -JQ  _Oj  r->  <-H  (D 

£    •       j)  "3  »  j:  s 

im      O               >  CO  >  ?-  ^ 

>t  A        "43  !>> "-S  >»  ©  jj 

?  .2   d  "S  S  's  £  ■  -   o 

£    E  .2    G  g  fl  b  X     "> 


H 
m 

< 
Pw 

Q 

< 

Z 
Z 


H 


CQ 

- 

— 

p 

-1 

cS 

(-. 

c 

a! 

p 

01 

- 

'. 

11 

-i 

o> 

P 

— 
CO 

X 

ft 

— 

CO 

o> 

— 

'c 

g 
- 

- 

jr. 

be 

o 

c 
y 

c    o    3    s    cj   o   a 


CO 

"^  .  ...  .     . 


-a 

a 

o> 

+J 

co' 

CO 

6 

CO                    °E    -^ 

+j    ~3 

'3     .        °3  .2 

— 

p      i 

c 
o 

c 
p 

M    r.       .     =   .=, 

■n,    a     <*>     '- 

~      H  •—   -C   M 

'■-     C    T     5     U 

es  o  ©  g   c 

'o 

Pi 

•i-i    t. 

H      0 

-  -<• 
r     P 

-  o 
V    — 

CS 

CO       CO      CO       cc      O 

o 

&       W 

o 

O  O  O  O  En 

'w 

Ph  h 

cq  C  C  Ex)  fei  '-< 


ANATOMY.  41 

The  os  8uffragini8  is  about  one-third  as  long  as  the  cannon  bone 
(the  bone  extending  from  the  knee  or  hock  to  the  fetlock)  and  reaches 
from  the  fetlock  joint  above  to  the  pastern  joint  below;  its  superior 
extremity  shows  a  shallow  cavity  on  each  side,  separated  in  the 
middle  by  a  deep  groove,  and  into  this  surface  fits  the  lower  end  of 
the  cannon  bone.  The  inferior  extremity  is  much  smaller  and  nar- 
rower than  the  upper;  on  each  side  is  a  small  convex  surface,  the 
two  surfaces  separated  in  the  middle  by  a  shallow  groove.  This 
extremity  meets  the  upper  end  of  the  os  corome  and  forms  the  pastern 
joint. 

The  os  corona  follows  the  direction  of  the  os  suffraginis  downward 
and  forward  and  lies  between  the  pastern  and  coffin  joints,  its  lower 
end  being  within  the  hoof. 

Its  superior  surface  shows  a  shallow  cavity  on  each  side,  with  a 
ridge  between  them  to  fit  the  lower  end  of  the  os  suffraginis.  The 
lower  surface  of  this  bone  shows  a  convex  part  on  each  side,  sepa- 
rated by  a  groove,  to  fit  the  upper  surface  of  the  coffin  bone  in  the 
coffin  joint. 

The  os  pedis  is  an  irregular  bone,  situated  within  the  hoof  and  is 
similar  to  it  in  shape. 

The  anterior  surface  is  known  as  the  wall  surface;  it  shows  a  num- 
ber of  small  openings,  called  fojQ&fflfflQ&f  for  the  passage  of  blood  vessels 
and  nerves,  and  is  roughened  to  give  attachment  to  the  soft  parts 
(s,  nsitivi  lamina  )  covering  it.  At  the  top  of  this  surface,  in  front,  is 
a  ridge  called  the  pyramidal  process,  to  which  is  attached  the  extensor 
pedis  tendon. 

The  lower  surface,  called  the  sole,  is  half-moon-shaped,  concave 
and  smooth,  and  is  covered  by  the  sensitive  sole.  The  upper  surface 
helps  to  form  the  coffin  joint  ami  is  called  the  articular  surface;  it 
shows  two  shallow  cavities,  separated  by  a  ridge. 

Just  back  of  the  articular  surface  is  a  small  triangular  surface  to  fit 
the  navicular  bone  behind. 

dust  back  of  the  sole  is  a  rough  surface,  to  which  is  attached  the 
flexor  pedis  perforans  tendon;  it  is  called  the  tendinous  surface. 

On  each  side  of  this  surface  is  a  groove  running  forward  and  termi- 
nating in  an  opening,  called  the  plantar  foramen;  an  artery  and  a 
nerve  enter  the  bone  and  a  vein  leaves  it  through  this  opening. 

On  each  side  of  the  os  pedis,  extending  backward,  is  a  prolongation, 
called  the  wing.  Each  wing  is  divided  by  a  notch  and  then  by  a 
groove,  which  runs  forward  on  the  outside  of  the  bone;  an  artery  lies 
in  the  notch  and  groove. 

The  ,'s  ruwicularis  is  an  irregular  bone  situated  behind  and  below 
the  os  corona1  and  behind  the  os  pedis,  articulating  with  both  bones. 
lt>  long  axis  is  perpendicular  to  the  axis  of  the  foot.  The  extremi- 
ties of  the  bone  are  attached  to  the  wings  of  the  os  pedis;  the  inferior 


42  nil      \K.\1Y    HORSE   IN   ACCIDENT   AND   DISEASE. 

surface  is  covered  with  cartilage,  which  forms  a  smooth  surface  for 
the  movements  of  the  tendon  of  the  flexor  pedis  perforans  muscle. 

Elastic  structures  of  (he  foot. 

All  of  the  parts  of  the  foot,  except  the  bones,  are  more  or  less  clastic 
or  "springy"  and  yield  when  pressure  is  applied;  hut  certain  parts 
have  a  very  high  degree  of  elasticity,  their  special  use  being  to  over- 
come the  effects  of  concussion  or  jar  when  the  foot  strikes  the  ground 
and  to  prevent  injury,  and  these  parts  are  referred  to  as  the  elastic 
structures  of  the  foot.  They  are  the  lateral  cartilages  ami  plantar 
cushion,  or  fatty  frog,  as  it  is  sometimes  called. 

The  lateral  cartilages  are  thin  plates  of  cartilage,  one  attached  to 
the  top  of  each  wing  of  the  os  pedis,  and  extending  backward  and 
upward  so  far  that  their  upper  borders  may  be  felt  under  the  skin 
above  the  coronet  at  the  heels. 

The  'plantar  cushion  is  a  very  elastic  wedge-shaped  pad,  which  fills 
up  the  space  between  the  two  lateral  cartilages  on  the  sides,  the  sen- 
sitive frog  below,  and  the  flexor  pedis  perforans  tendon  above. 

The  point  or  anterior  part  of  the  plantar  cushion  extends  forward 
to  the  ridge  which  separates  the  sole  from  the  tendinous  surface  of 
the  os  pedis.     The  base  is  covered  by  the  skin  above  the  heels. 

Sensitive  structures  of  the  foot. 

Over  the  bones  and  elastic  structures  of  the  foot  is  found  a  com- 
plete covering  of  very  sensitive  flesh,  and  from  each  part  of  this  cover- 
ing some  part  of  the  hoof  is  secreted  or  formed.  The  divisions  of  this 
layer  of  flesh  are  called  the  sensitive  parts  or  structures  of  the  foot. 
They  are  the  coronary  land,  sensitive  laminae,  sensitive  sole,  sensitive 
frog,  and  the  coronary  frog  band. 

The  coronary  band  is  a  thick  convex  band  of  tough  flesh,  about  four- 
fifths  of  an  inch  wide,  and  extends  entirely  around  the  top  of  the  hoof 
from  one  bulb  of  the  heel  to  the  other;  in  front  it  is  attached  to  the 
extensor  pedis  tendon,  and  on  the  sides  to  ligaments  of  the  coffin  joint , 
to  the  lower  end  of  the  os  corona?,  and  to  the  lateral  cartilages.  The 
surface  of  the  coronary  band  is  covered  with  small  pointed  projections 
or  villi.  The  coronary  band  secretes  or  forms  the  principal  part 
(middle  layer)  of  the  wall  of  the  hoof. 

The  sensitive  laminae  (fleshy  leaves)  cover  and  are  firmly  attached 
to  the  anterior  or  wall  surface  of  the  os  pedis  and  to  the  lower  part  of 
the  outer  surface  of  the  lateral  cartilages.  These  delicate  leaves  of 
the  flesh  dovetail  into  the  horny  laminae  which  they  secrete  and,  with 
them,  serve  to  fasten  the  wall  of  the  hoof  to  the  os  pedis  and  to  the 
lateral  cartilages. 

The  sensitive  sole  covers  the  sole  surface  of  the  os  pedis,  is  covered 
with  villi,  and  secretes  the  horny  sole. 


ANATOMY.  43 

The  sensitive  frog  covers  the  lower  face  of  the  plantar  cushion,  and 
from  its  villi  the  horny  frog  is  secreted. 

The  coronary  frog  band  or  perioplic  ring  is  a  narrow  band  of  flesh 
running  around  just  above  the  coronary  band  and  separated  from  it 
by  a  faint  groove.  From  the  fine  villi  on  the  surface  of  this  ring  the 
delicate  fibers  grow  which  form  the  jxriople. 

The  hoof. 

The  box  or  case1  of  horn,  called  the  hoof,  which  incloses  and  protects 
the  other  structures  of  the  foot,  is  divided  into  three  parts — wall, 
sole,  and  frog.     In  a  healthy  foot  these  parts  are  solidly  united. 

The  wall  is  the  part  seen  when  the  foot  is  on  the  ground ;  it  extends 
from  the  edge  of  the  hair  to  the  ground  and  is  divided  into  the  toe, 
quart V  rs,  ho  Is,  and  bars;  it  has  an  internal  surface,  an  external  surface, 
and  an  upper  and  a  lower  border. 

The  toe  is  the  front  part  of  the  wall.  It  is  steeper  in  the  hind  foo< 
than  in  the  fore.  The  quarters  extend  backward  from  the  toe  to  the 
heels.  The  heel  or  buttress  is  that  part  of  the  wall  where  it  bends 
inward  and  forward,  and  the  bar  is  the  division  of  the  wall  running 
from  the  heel  to  within  about  1  inch  of  the  point  or  apex  of  the  frog. 
It  lies  between  the  horny  sole  and  the  frog. 

The  external  surface  of  the  wall  is  covered  by  a  thin  varnish-like 
coat  of  fine  horn,  called  the  periople. 

The  internal  surface  of  the  wall  is  covered  by  from  500  to  600  thin 
plates  or  leaves  of  horn,  called  the  horny  laminse.  Between  the 
horny  laminae,  which  run  parallel  to  each  other  and  in  a  direction 
downward  and  forward,  there  are  fissures  into  which  dovetail  the 
sensitive  laminae,  and  this  union,  as  previously  stated,  binds  the  wall 
of  the  hoof  to  the  os  pedis  and  lateral  cartilages. 

The  upper  border  of  the  wall  shows  a  deep  groove  (coronary  groove  I 
into  which  fits  the  coronary  band. 

The  lower  border  is  called  the  "bearing  edge"  (or  "spread"  in  the 
unshod  foot  )  and  is  the  pari  to  which  the  shoe  is  fitted. 

The  homy  sole  is  a  thick  plate  of  horn,  somewhat  half-moon-shaped, 
and  has  two  surfaces  and  two  borders. 

The  upper  surface  is  convex  (round  or  bulging  upward)  and  is  in 
union  with  the  sensitive  sole  from  which  the  horny  sole  grows.  The 
lower  surface  is  concave  or  hollowed  out  and  is  covered  with  scales  or 
crusts  of  dead  horn,  which  gradually  loosen  and  fall  off. 

The  outer  border  of  the  sole  joins  the  inner  part  of  the  lower  border 
of  the  wall  by  means  of  a  ring  of  soft  horn,  called  the  whiti  lint .  This 
mark  or  line  is  sometimes  called  the  guidt  line,  as  it  shows  where  the 
nail  should  be  started  in  shoeing. 

The  inner  border  is  a  V-shaped  notch  and  is  in  union  with  the  bars, 
except  at  its  narrow  part  where  it  joins  the  frog. 


44  THE   AliMV    HORSE    129    ACCIDENT    AND    DISEASE. 

The  horny  sole  protects  the  sensitive  .sole  and  does  not,  in  a  healthy 
Eootj  bear  Weight,  except  B  very  narrow  border  at  the  white  line,  an 
eighth  or  tenth  of  an  inch  in  width. 

The  horny  frog  is  the  wedge-shaped  mass  of  horn  filling  up  the  tri- 
angular spaee  between  the  bars.  The  lower  face  shows  two  prominent 
ridges,  separated  behind  by  a  cavity,  called  the  cleft,  and  joining  in 
front  at  the  apt  c  or  point  of  the  frog;  these  ridges  terminate  behind  in 
the  bulbs  of  the  frog.  Between  the  sides  of  the  frog  and  the  bars  are 
tw«>  cavities,  called  the  commissures.  The  upper  surface  of  the  horny 
frog  is  the  exact  reverse  of  the  lower  and  shows  in  the  middle  a  ridge 
of  horn,  called  the  frog  stay,  which  assists  in  forming  a  firm  union  be- 
tween the  horny  and  sensitive  frog.  The  horny  frog  serves  to  break 
the  jar  or  concussion  by  acting  as  a  cushion  or  pad;  it  protects  the 
sensitive  frog  and  prevents  the  foot  from  slipping. 

Structurt   of  horn. 

The  horn  of  the  hoof  presents  a  fibrous  appearance  and  consists 
of  very  fine  horn  fibers  or  tubes,  similar  to  hairs,  running  downward 
and  forward  and  held  together  by  a  cementing  substance.  The 
horn  fibers  of  wall,  sole,  and  frog  all  run  in  the  same  direction,  down- 
ward and  forward,  the  only  difference  being  that  those  of  the  frog 
are  much  finer  and  softer  and  run  in  wavy  lines,  whereas  the  fibers 
of  wall  and  sole  are  straight. 

The  horn  fibers  grow  from  the  small  villi,  which  cover  the  surfaces 
of  the  coronary  band,  sensitive  sole,  and  sensitive  frog. 

Circulation  of  blood  through  the  foot. 

In  previous  study  of  the  arteries  we  have  seen  that  the  large 
metacarpal  of  the  fore  leg  and  the  great  metatarsal  of  the  hind  leg 
each  divides  just  above  the  fetlock  into  two  branches.  These 
branches  are  called  the  external  and  internal  digital  arteries,  one  on 
the  inner  and  one  on  the  outer  side  of  the  fetlock  joint.  They 
follow  the  borders  of  the  flexor  tendons  downward  and  terminate 
inside  of  the  wings  of  the  os  pedis.  Each  of  the  internal  and  external 
digital  arteries  gives  off  five  branches — the  perpendicular,  transverse, 
artery  of  the  frog,  preplantar  ungual,  and  plantar  ungual. 

The  perpendicular  artery  is  given  off  at  right  angles  about  the 
middle  of  the  os  suffraginis,  descends  on  the  side  of  the  pastern, 
bends  forward  and  joins  with  the  artery  of  the  same  name  from  the 
opposite  side  and  forms  the  superficial  coronary  <irch.  From  this 
arch  branches  descend  to  the  coronary  band. 

The  transverse  artery  comes  off  under  the  upper  border  of  the  lateral 
cartilage,  runs  forward,  and  joins  its  fellow  from  the  opposite  side 
between  the  extensor  pedis  tendon  and  the  os  corona?.     The  deep 


ANATOMY.  45 

coronary  arch  is  the  name  given  to  this  arrangement  of  the  arteries, 
and  branches  from  this  arch  also  supply  the  coronary  band. 

The  artery  of  the  frog  rises  behind  the  pastern  joint  at  the  upper 
border  of  the  lateral  cartilage.  It  has  two  branches — a  posterior, 
which  runs  back  and  supplies  the  bull)  of  the  heel,  and  an  anterior, 
which  runs  forward  and  downward  through  the  plantar  cushion  and 
supplies  the  sensitive  frog. 

The  pre  plantar  ungual  artery  is  given  off  inside  the  wing  of  the  os 
pedis,  passes  through  the  preplantar  notch,  and  runs  forward  along 
the  preplantar  groove  on  the  side  of  the  bone.  It  helps  supply  the 
sensitive  lamina:  with  blood  and  sends  some  small  branches  into  the 
bone  to  join  branches  from  other  arteries. 

The  plantar  ungual  artery  is  the  terminal  or  last  branch  of  the 
digital  artery  (is  a  continuation  of  that  artery)  and  enters  the  os 
pedis  at  the  plantar  foramen. 

The  two  plantar  ungual  arteries  run  forward  within  the  bone  and 
unite  to  form  the  circulus  arteriosus.  From  this  circle  spring  ascend- 
ing and  descending  branches.  The  ascending  branches,  called  the 
anterior  laminal  arteries,  leave  the  bone  through  the  small  openings 
(foramina )  and  supply  the  sensitive  laminae  in  front.  The  descending 
blanches,  called  the  inferior  communicating  arteries,  are  about  fourteen 
in  number  and  emerge  from  the  bone  by  the  openings  just  above  its 
lower  edge;  they  unite  to  form  a  large  trunk,  running  around  the  toe 
of  the  os  pedis,  called  the  circumflex  artery,  and  this  artery  gives  off 
ascending  and  descending  branches.  The  ascending  branches  pass 
into  the  sensitive  laminae,  and  the  descending  branches,  called  the 
solar  arteries,  numbering  about  fourteen,  run  backward  through  the 
sensitive  sole  to  form  a  second  circle,  called  the  inferior  circumflex 
artery. 

The  veins  of  the  foot  are  arranged  in  networks,  each  network  or 
plexus  named  from  the  parts  in  which  it  is  located.  The  solar  plexus 
is  found  running  all  through  the  sensitive  sole.  The  laminal  plexus 
runs  through  and  under  the  sensitive  laminae.  The  coronary  plexus 
surrounds  the  os  corona1  and  upper  part  of  the  os  pedis,  just  under 
the  coronary  band. 

The  veins  of  the  frog  are  those  found  in  the  plantar  cushion  and 
sensitive  frog;  the  interosseous  veins  form  a  network  within  the  os 
pedis.  The  veins  of  the  foot  all  unite  above  to  form  a  large  trunk, 
called  the  digital  vein,  which  runs  along  the  digital  artery  and  carries 
the  blood  back  toward  the  heart.  The  veins  of  the  foot  are  valveless 
below  the  middle  of  the  pastern,  an  arrangement  which  allows  the 
blood  to  flow  in  either  direction  when  pressure  is  applied  and  thus 
prevents  injury. 


46  THE   ARMY   HORSE    IN    ACCIDENT  AND  DISEASE. 

Nerves  of  flu  foot. 

The  nerves  of  the  foot  supply  feeling  or  the  sense  of  touch  to  the 
pints.  The  Large  nerve  cord  on  either  side  of  the  limb  divides  at  the 
fetlock  joint  into  three  branches,  culled  the  digital  nerves — the 
anterior,  the  posterior,  and  the  middle. 

The  anterior  digital  nerve  passes  downward  and  forward  and  sup- 
plies the  anterior  or  front  pari  of  the  foot. 

The  posterior  digital  nerve,  the  largest  of  the  three,  passes  down 
behind  the  digital  artery  to  supply  the  structures  in  the  posterior  pari 
of  the  foot.  It  gives  off  a  branch  which  passes  through  the  notch  in 
the  wing  of  the  os  pedis  (in  company  with  the  preplantar  ungual 
artery)  to  supply  some  of  the  sensitive  laminae;  it  also  sends  branches 
into  the  os  pedis  with  the  plantar  ungual  artery. 

The  middle  branch  is  very  small,  is  said  to  always  join  the  anterior 
branch,  and  supplies  the  sensitive  sole  and  fetlock  pad. 

The  functions  of  most  of  the  parts  of  the  foot  have  been  mentioned 
in  passing,  but  there  are  some  points  in  connection  with  the  physi- 
ology of  the  foot  which  need  to  be  explained  more  in  detail. 

Expansion  and  contraction. 

When  weight  comes  upon  the  leg,  the  os  pedis  descends  slightly 
ami  causes  the  sole  to  descend  and  flatten.  The  plantar  cushion 
and  horny  frog  are  compressed  between  the  ground  below  and  the 
structures  above;  this  compression  causes  them  to  spread  out  side- 
wise,  carrying  outward  the  lateral  cartilages  and  bars  and  the  wall 
at  the  quarters.  This  is  called  expansion.  When  weight  is  removed 
from  the  leg,  the  plantar  cushion  becomes  thicker  and  narrower,  and 
the  lateral  cartilages  and  quarters  move  inward  to  where  they  were 
before  expanding.  This  is  called  contraction.  The  elastic  lateral 
cartilage  is  merely  a  flexible  extension  of  the  wing  of  the  os  pedis  and 
would  appear  to  have  been  specially  designed  for  expansion  and  con- 
traction at  the  quarters.  It  is  also  to  be  noted  that  the  bars  are  a 
provision  for  this  same  purpose,  since  expansion  and  contraction 
could  not  take  place  if  the  wall  formed  a  solid  unbroken  ring  around 
the  hoof. 

In  addition  to  breaking  the  jar  when  the  foot  comes  to  the  ground, 
the  plantar  cushion  has  another  important  use.  It  assists  in  the 
circulation  of  the  blood  through  the  veins  of  the  foot.  When  weight 
is  placed  upon  the  foot  the  pressure  on  the  plantar  cushion  forces  the 
blood  upward  through  the  veins;  then,  when  the  foot  is  lifted  and 
the  pressure  is  removed  from  the  horny  frog  and  plantar  cushion, 
the  veins  of  the  frog  again  fill  with  blood,  and  this  pumping  action  is 
repeated  with  each  step.  Proof  of  this  statement  is  seen  when  a 
digital  vein  is  cut,  by  accident  or  in  experiment.  If  the  horse  is 
walked,  a  jet  of  blood  spurts  out  each  time  he  puts  the  foot  to  the 
ground;  but  if  he  is  allowed  to  stand  the  blood  flows  in  a  steady 


ANATOMY.  47 

stream  from  the  vein.  Great  injury  to  the  foot  results  from  starting 
the  horse  off  suddenly  at  a  fast  gait  on  a  hard  road  after  he  has  been 
st  anding  for  some  time  or  when  he  first  comes  out  of  the  stable.  The 
circulation  (just  explained)  and  the  structures  of  the  foot  should 
have  time  to  gradually  adapt  themselves  to  the  change  from  rest  to 
severe  work. 

Moisture. 

The  wall  of  the  healthy  hoof,  is,  by  weight,  about  one-fourth  water, 
the  sole  more  than  one-third,  and  the  frog  almost  one-half.  This 
water  is  supplied  by  the  blood  and  preserves  the  horn  in  a  tough  and 
elastic  condition.  The  hoof,  particularly  the  frog,  is  capable  of 
absorbing  moisture  from  the  ground.  The  periople,  which  covers 
the  wall,  prevents  the  evaporation  of  water,  and  therefore  should 
never  be  rasped.  As  there  is  no  similar  covering  for  the  sole  and 
the  frog,  the  layers  of  horn  on  their  exposed  surfaces  dry  out  and 
die.  The  dead  layers  are  hard  and  brittle,  and  gradually  fall  or  flake 
off;  but,  as  they  preserve  the  moisture  in  the  layers  of  live  horn 
beneath,  they  should  not  be  removed  in  preparing  the  hoof  for 
shoeing. 

Shoeing. 

Shoeing  is  a  necessary  evil,  but  by  remembering  the  functions  of 
the  various  parts  of  the  foot  the  damage  resulting  may  be  limited  to 
a  comparatively  small  amount. 

The  following  rules  may  serve  as  a  guide  for  the  shoeing  of  healthy 
feet  : 

1.  The  wall,  being  the  weight  bearer,  should  be  rasped  perfectly 
level  or  the  foot  will  be  thrown  out  of  its  true  position,  causing  extra 
strain  on  some  of  the  ligaments. 

2.  Fit  the  shoe  accurately  to  the  outline  of  the  foot;  do  not  alter 
the  latter  to  fit  the  shoe.  Rasping  away  the  exterior  of  the  crust  to 
fit  the  shoe  not  only  renders  the  horn  brittle  but  is  so  much  loss  of 
bearing  surface. 

3.  The  sole  should  not  be  touched  with  the  knife;  loose  flakes 
may  be  removed  with  a  blunt  instrument. 

4.  The  bars  should  not  be  cut  away;  they  are  a  part  of  the  wall 
and  intended  to  cany  weight.     The  shoe  should  rest  on  them. 

5.  The  frog  should  not  be  cut,  but  left  to  attain  its  full  growth. 
No  frog  can  perform  its  functions  unless  on  a  level  with  the  ground 
surface  of  the  shoe. 

6.  The  shoe  should  have  a  true  and  level  bearing  and  rest  well 
and  firmly  on  the  wall  and  bars. 

A  plain  Light-weight  shoe  is  the  best — plain  on  both  ground  and 
foot  surface. 

7.  High  nailing  is  injurious;  do  not  use  any  more  nails  than  are 
absolutely  necessary,  as  the  nails  destroy  the  horn. 

5417—09 4 


CHAPTER  IV. 


ADMINISTRATION  OF  MEDICINES-WEIGHTS  AND  MEASURES. 

ADMINISTRATION    OF    MEDICINES. 

Medicines  may  enter  the  body  through  any  of  the  following 
designated  channels:  First,  by  the  mouth;  second,  by  the  lungs 
and  upper  air  passages;  third,  by  the  skin;  fourth,  under  the  skin 
(hypodermic-ally) ;  fifth,  by  the  rectum:  and  sixth,  by  intravenous 
injection. 

By  the  mouth. — Medicines  can  be  given  by  the  mouth  in  the  form 
of  powders,  balls,  and  drenches. 

By  the  air  passages. — Medicines  are  administered  to  the  lungs 
and  upper  air  passages  by  inhalations  and  nasal  douches. 

By  the  skin. — Care  must  be  taken  in  applying  some  medicines 
over  too  large  a  portion  of  the  body  at  any  one  time,  as  poisoning 
and  death  may  follow  from  too  rapid  absorption  through  the  skin. 
For  domestic  animals  medicines  are  to  be  applied  to  the  skin  for 
local  purposes  or  diseases  only. 

By  the  rectum. — Medicines  may  be  given  by  the  rectum  when  we 
can  not  give  or  have  them  retained  by  the  mouth;  when  we  want 
local  action;  to  destroy  the  small  worms  infesting  the  large  bowels; 
to  stimulate  the  natural  movement  of  the  intestine  and  cause  an 
evacuation;  and  to  nourish  the  body. 

WEIGHTS    AND    MEASURES. 

Solid  measur< ." 

60  grains  (gr.) 1  dram  i ,~  . 

8  drams 1  ounce  ( .-,  I. 

16  ounces 1  pound  i  lb.  I. 

Liquid  measun . 

60  minims  (min.) 1  fluid  dram  (f.  5)- 

8  fluid  drams 1  fluid  ounce  I  f.  .",  I. 

16  fluid  ounces 1  pint  (O.). 

32  fluid  ounces 1  quart  i  Oii.  I. 

4  quarts 1  gallon  (Ci. 

"The  difference  in  weight  between  the  apothecaries'  ounce  I  180  grains)  and  the 

ounce  avoirdupois  (437.5  grains)  is  neglected  in  handling  veterinary  or  bulky  medi- 
cines. 

48 


WEIGHTS   AND    MEASURES.  49 

PRESCRIPTIONS. 

In  writing  prescriptions,  Roman  numerals  are  used  instead  of 
Arabic  (ordinary  figures)  and  the  numerals  follow  the  symbols, 
thus:  .">  vii  for  7  drams;  f  3  xii  for  12  fluid  drams,  etc.  S.  S.  signifies 
one  half,  thus:  5  ii  s.  s.  for  2\  drams. 

FIELD    EXPEDIENTS. 

In  garrison,  doses  must  be  accurately  measured  by  scales  or 
graduates,  according  to  the  tables  of  dry  or  liquid  measure,  but 
in  the  field  the  following  rough  expedients  may  be  used: 

Dry  measure. 

II  ounce  of  lead  acetate. 
|  ounce  of  zinc  sulphate. 
2  drams  of  a  powder. 
1  ounce  of  a  salt. 

( trdnance  t  in  cup §  of  a  quart. 

Full  day's  ration  of  medium-weight  oats.   14  cups. 

Liquid  measure. 

A  drop 1  minim. 

A  teaspoonful 1  fluid  dram. 

A  tablespoonful \  fluid  ounce. 

Tin  cup 28  ounces=|  of  a  quart. 


CHAPTER  A'. 


WOUNDS,    SPRAINS,    BRUISES,    ABRASIONS,    AND    ABSCESSES. 

WOUNDS    AND   THEIR    TREATMENT. 

Wounds  (separations  of  the  soft  tissues)  are  classed  as:  Incised 
wounds,  or  cuts;  lacerated  wounds,  or  tears;  and  punctured  wounds,  or 
holes. 

A  dressing  is  a  local,  periodically  repeated  treatment,  producing 
a  continued  action,  and  often  following  the  performance  of  an  opera- 
tion. It  is  the  application  upon  the  surface  of  the  wound  of  healing 
substances,  which,  in  some  cases,  are  mechanically  held  in  place  by 
bandages,  stitches,  etc. 

Before  applying  a  dressing  the  wound  should  be  thoroughly 
cleansed  and  freed  from  blood,  pus,  the  remains  of  previous  dressing, 
and,  in  a  word,  of  any  foreign  or  other  substances  capable  of  becoming 
sources  of  irritation.  This  is  best  done  with  water,  but  the  effect  is 
frequently  greatly  improved  by  combining  with  it  some  of  the  anti- 
septics, such  as  carbolic  acid,  creolin,  bichloride  of  mercury,  etc. 

Antiseptics  are  remedies  winch  prevent  putrefaction,  or  rotting, 
and  their  combinations  with  water  are  called  solutions. 

The  solution  may  be  applied  by  carefully  passing  a  saturated 
ball  of  oakum  over  the  surface  of  the  wound,  or  it  may  be  used  more 
freely  in  larger  ablutions  (washings).  Crusts  or  scabs,  if  present, 
may  be  removed  with  the  scissors  or  scraped  away  with  the  knife, 
but  *the  finger  nails  must  never  be  used  for  such  a  purpose,  for  the 
practice  is  both  filthy  and  dangerous.  The  wound  is  to  be  handled 
only  when  necessary;  all  needless  handling  irritates.  If  the  wound 
is  deep,  it  should  be  cleansed  by  syringing. 

The  essential  condition  of  cleanliness  applies  not  only  to  the  wound 
but  also  to  the  materials  used  for  dressings,  and  soiled  cloths  or 
bandages  and  dirty  oakum  must  be  rigorously  rejected;  everything 
(Dining  in  contact  with  a.  wound  must  be  absolutely  clean,  hands  as 
well  as  instruments  and  dressings.  Instruments,  however,  should 
never  be  immersed  in  the  bichloride  solution,  which  rapidly  corrodes 
metal. 
50 


WOUNDS,  SPRAINS,  BRUISES,  ABRASIONS,   AND   ABSCESSES.         51 

In  the  treatment  of  all  wounds  cleanliness  is  of  more  impor- 
tance than  medication,  but  the  two  in  combination,  when  thoroughly 
and  intelligently  carried  out,  will  leave  no  room  for  the  propagation 
and  ravages  of  those  germs  that  cause  the  formation  of  pus  and 
retard  the  healing  process.  The  farrier,  or  the  man  who  is  to  care 
for  the  injured  animal,  should  have  his  hands  thoroughly  clean,  and 
should  procure  in  a  clean  can  or  bucket  a  solution  of  creolin  or  other 
antiseptic,  and  several  (dean  pieces  of  cotton,  gauze,  or  oakum. 
Sponges  are  cleaned  with  difficulty  and  should  not  be  used. 

If  hemorrhage  (bleeding)  is  profuse  the  first  step  is  to  arrest  the 
flow  of  blood  by  ligating  (tying)  the  blood  vessel  or  vessels  with  a 
piece  of  silk,  or  if  none  is  at  hand,  with  a  clean  piece  of  string;  if 
the  blood  vessels  can  not  be  tied,  a  thick  pad  made  of  cotton  or  of 
several  layers  of  gauze  or  clean  cloth,  folded  so  as  to  cover  the  wound, 
and  held  firmly  in  place  by  one  or  more  cotton  bandages,  will  check 
the  flow  of  blood.  This  arrangement,  called  a  compress,  should  be 
left  on  until  the  hemorrhage  ceases,  and  the  wound  treated  as  de- 
scribed later. 

In  applying  dressings  (except  compresses)  unnecessary  pressure 
should  be  avoided,  especially  on  the  soft  tissues. 

Incised  wounds. — If  the  injury  is  one  that  can  be  sutured  (sewed) 
a  needle  and  silk  should  be  immersed  in  a  solution  of  creolin — creolin 
1  part,  water  50  parts;  the  hair  around  the  wound  should  either  be 
shaved  or  be  clipped  with  a  pair  of  shears,  and  the  wound  thoroughly 
cleansed  by  washing  it  with  cotton  saturated  with  the  creolin  solu- 
tion; all  dirt  and  hair  must  be  removed,  all  ragged  edges,  if  any, 
cut  away,  and  the  edges  of  the  wound  placed  in  contact  with  each 
other  if  possible  and  held  in  place  by  the  aid  of  sutures,  care  being 
taken  to  allow  free  drainage;  the  wound  should  then  be  wiped  dry 
with  a  fresh  piece  of  cotton  or  gauze,  and  over  the  surface  should  be 
dusted  some  iodoform  or  acetanilid.  If  the  location  will  permit, 
the  wound  should  be  covered  with  a  pad  of  gauze  or  absorbent  cotton, 
and  a  cotton  bandage  wrapped  around  the  parts  to  hold  the  pad  in 
place.  The  wound  should  be  dressed  once  or  twice  a  day  until  the 
formation  of  pus  ceases;  when  the  wound  is  dry,  only  the  powder 
should  be  used. 

Lacerated  wounds. — If  the  wound  is  a  large  one,  with  the  skin  and 
tissues  so  badly  torn  and  lacerated  as  not  to  admit  of  the  use  of 
sutures,  the  torn  and  ragged  edges  (especially  if  the  lower  part  of" 
the  wound  hangs  down)  should  be  removed  with  the  knife  or  scissors 
and  the  wound  dressed  as  above  directed.  When  the  wound  begins 
to  granulate  (fill  with  new  tissue)  care  should  be  taken  thai  the 
granulations  are  not  allowed  to  grow  out  higher  than  the  skin,  caus- 
ing the  condition  known  as  proud jlesh. 


52  THE   AKMY    HORSE    IN   ACCIDENT   AND   DISEASE. 

The  treatment  of  proud  flesh  consists  in  the  removal  of  the  un- 
healthy t issue*  by  the  use  of  the  knife  or  by  the  application  of  a  red- 
hoi  iron;  burnt  alum  or  salicylic  acid  dusted  upon  the  surface  of  the 
wound  will  also  destroy  the  unhealthy  granules. 

Punctured  wounds. — Punctured  wounds  (except  those  around 
joints)  should  be  explored  with  a  probe  to  ascertain  if  any  foreign 
bodies  are  in  the  channel;  if  so,  they  should  be  removed,  and  if  neces- 
sary a  dependent  opening  be  made  to  allow  perfect  drainage.  The 
parts  should  then  be  syringed  out  thoroughly  with  a  solution  of 
creolin,  1  to  50;  carbolic  acid,  1  to  20  or  30;  or  bichloride  of  mercury, 
1  to  1,000,  and  the  outside  opening  sprinkled  with  iodoform.  This 
treatment  should  be  applied  twice  daily. 

For  a  few  days  the  wound  should  be  swabbed  with  tincture  of 
iodine  or  packed  with  strips  of  gauze  saturated  with  this  drug  in 
order  to  destroy  infection,  check  the  formation  of  pus,  and  promote 
the  growth  of  healthy  tissue. 

Wounds  of  the  lips,  nostrils,  and  eyelids  heal  very  rapidly;  if  of 
several  days'  standing,  they  should  have  their  edges  scraped  and  then 
be  sutured,  and  iodoform  or  acetanilid  dusted  over  the  surface  twice 
daily. 

An  excellent  antiseptic  solution  for  the  treatment  of  wounds 
during  fly  time  is  made  by  dissolving  8  ounces  of  gum  camphor  in  3 
ounces  of  carbolic  acid.  Apply  with  a  clean  swab  several  times  daily. 
One  ounce  of  creolin  to  8  ounces  of  olive  oil  is  a  good  substitute. 

Punctured  wounds  around  joints. 

Open  joint  is  a  wound  situated  on  a  joint  and  extending  through 
the  capsular  ligament,  allowing  the  joint  oil  to  escape. 

Treatment. — Remove  the  hair  and  thoroughly  clean  the  parts 
around  the  wound  with  a  solution  of  bichloride  of  mercury,  1  to  1 ,000; 
unless  a  foreign  body  is  known  to  be  lodged  in  it.  do  not  probe  or 
explore,  as  the  introduction  of  any  instrument,  even  if  thoroughly 
clean,  will  be  the  means  of  setting  up  considerable  inflammation. 
Apply  a  blister  of  biniodide  of  mercury  1  part,  cosmoline  1  parts,  for 
the  purpose  of  closing  the  opening,  limiting  motion,  and  relieving 
pain.  Use  the  slings  if  the  wound  is  very  painful.  If  the  wound 
is  so  large  that  a  blister  will  not  close  it,  the  treatment  should  be 
as  prescribed  for  an  open  wound. 

A  punctured  tendon  sheath  is  treated  like  a  punctured  joint. 

CAUSE    AM)    TREATMENT    OF    SPRAINS. 

Sprains  affect  muscles,  tendons,  and  ligaments.  The  fibers  of 
which  they  are  composed  are  severely  stretched,  sometimes  torn  in 
serious  cases,  causing  inflammation  and  subsequent  contraction,  and, 
in  case  of  muscles,  atroph}'  or  sweeny   (wasting  away  ). 


PLATE  X. 


Fig.  1 ,  Curb.  Fig.  2,  Bursal  enlargement.    Fig.  3,  Sprain  of  the  flexor  tendons 
ibowed  tendons  i.    Fig.  4,  Line  firing.    Fig.  5,  Capped  hock. 


WOUNDS,  SPRAINS,  BRUISES,  ABRASIONS,  AND   ABSCESSES.         53 

Strains  of  the  muscles. 

Muscle  strains  occur  in  various  parts  of  the  trunk  and  limbs; 
thus,  a  horse  may  strain  the  neck  muscles,  as  a  result  of  falling 
on  the  head;  the  muscles  of  the  dorsal  region  may  be  strained 
by  the  hind  feet  slipping  backward.  When  a  muscle  is  strained 
the  injury  is  succeeded  by  pain,  swelling,  heat,  and  loss  of  function. 

An  inflamed  muscle  can  no  longer  contract;  hence  in  some  strains 
the  symptoms  resemble  those  of  paralysis. 

Sprains  of  the  suspensory  ligament  and  flexor  tendons. 

(''  Breakdown  "  and  "  Bowed  tendons.") 

The  fibrous  structures  situated  behind  the  cannon  bone,  both  in 
the  front  and  hind  legs,  are  often  the  seat  of  lacerations  or  sprains 
resulting  from  violent  efforts  or  sudden  jerks.  The  injury  is  easily 
recognized  by  the  changed  appearance  of  the  parts,  which  become 
more  or  less  swollen;  the  swelling  usually  extending  from  the  knee 
down  to  the  fetlock  and  occasionally  even  farther.  It  is  always 
characterized  by  heat  and  is  variously  sensitive,  ranging  from  a  mere 
tenderness  to  a  degree  of  soreness  which  sin-inks  from  the  lightest 
touch.  The  degree  of  lameness  corresponds  to  the  severity  of  the 
injury.     Sprain  of  the  flexor  tendon  is  shown  in  Plate  X,  figure  3. 

Sprains  of  ligaments. 

The  calcaneo-cuboid  ligament,  situated  at  the  back  part  of  the 
hock  and  uniting  the  calcaneum,  the  cuboid,  and  the  external  splint 
bones,  is  frequently  sprained.  This  condition  is  known  as  a  "curb" 
(Plate  X,  Fig.  1). 

The  various  ligaments  entering  into  the  formation  of  joints  are 
subject  to  sprains  and  injuries.  This  condition  is  indicated  by 
lameness,  accompanied  by  pain,  heat,  and  swelling. 

The  capsular  ligament  when  sprained  very  often  becomes  weak- 
ened, resulting  in  distention  of  the  synovial  sac  (Plate  X,  Fig.  2). 
Bursal  enlargements  receive  different  names,  according  to  their 
location.  Bog  spavin  is  a  characteristic  bursal  enlargement.  It  is 
found  on  the  front  and  inner  side  of  the  hock  joint  and  varies  in  size 
with  the  amount  of  distention  of  the  capsular  ligament.  The  trouble 
is  usually  caused  by  slipping,  hard  and  fast  work,  irregular  exercise, 
and  high  feeding.  Draft  animals,  pulling  heavy  loads  over  rough  or 
slippery  ground,  are  particularly  subject  to  tins  injury,  which  is  also 
more  commonly  seen  in  young  than  in  mature  animals.  The  swell- 
ing can  be  readily  detected;  under  pressure  it  fluctuates;  heat  may 
or  may  not  be  present;  lameness  rarely  results  unless  the  injury  be 
accompanied  by  complications,  such  as  bone  spavin  or  bony  deposits. 


54  THE   AK.MV    SOBSE    IN    A.CCIDENT   AND   DISEASE. 

In  sprain  of  the  stifle  joint,  the  ligaments  holding  it  in  position  are 
severely  stretched,  in  some  cases  sprained  or  ruptured,  and  even  dis- 
location of  the  patella  may  occur.  In  this  trouble  the  patella  is  forced 
outward  and  thus  makes  the  joint  immovable,  the  leg  being  extended 
backward  and  the  foot  resting  on  the  toe.  If  the  animal  is  forced  to 
move,  he  drags  the  leg,  being  unable  to  bring  it  forward  in  the  natural 
maimer  on  account  of  the  dislocation.  The  bone  is  returned  to  place 
in  the  following  manner:  A  rope  having  been  placed  about  the  pas- 
tern, the  leg  is  steadily  drawn  forward  by  one  or  more  assistants, 
while  the  operator  stretches  the  patella  forward  and  inward.  When 
the  bone  regains  its  proper  position,  the  animal  has  proper  control 
of  his  leg.  Reduce  the  inflammation  promptly  and  blister  as  ex- 
plained below.  In  case  the  patella  persists  in  slipping  out  again,  a 
rope  should  be  fastened  to  the  pastern  and  attached  to  the  collar 
about  the  horse's  neck;  the  rope  should  be  drawn  tight  enough  to 
prevent  the  horse  extending  his  leg  to  the  rear,  but  allowing  him  to 
stand  upon  it;    keep  the  rope  on  until  the  blister  has  worked. 

tit  in  in!  t/Kitment  of  sprains. — Perfect  rest  is  absolutely  necessary 
and  must  never  be  overlooked  in  the  treatment  of  all  sprains;  there- 
fore the  injured  animal  should  be  at  once  removed  to  a  level  stall 
where  it  can  remain  until  complete  recovery  has  taken  place.  Hot  or 
cold  applications  should  be  applied  to  the  injured  parts.  These  appli- 
cations should  be  in  the  form  of  fomentations  (bathing),  or  bandages 
saturated  with  water.  Flannel  bandages  must  not  be  allowed  to  dry 
while  in  contact  with  the  injured  parts,  as  flannel  applied  wet,  shrinks 
in  drying,  and  will  not  only  retard  the  reparative  process,  but  cause 
unnecessary  pain.  Cold  water  is  often  materially  assisted  in  ac- 
complishing the  desired  results  by  the  addition  of  acetate  of  lead  or 
sulphate  of  zinc,  witch-hazel,  or  nitrate  of  potash.  A  convenient 
solution  is  made  as  follows:  Acetate  of  lead  and  sulphate  of  zinc,  each 
1  ounce;  water,  1  quart;  or,  1  pint  of  witch-hazel,  1  ounce  of  acetate 
of  lead,  and  water  enough  to  make  1  quart.  If  pain  is  very  >evere 
the  following  may  be  used:  Tincture  opium,  4  ounces;  acetate  of 
lead,  2  ounces;  water  to  make  1  quart;  this  application  is  of  more 
benefit  when  applied  warm.  All  applications  should  be  used  several 
times  daily. 

If,  after  the  inflammation  is  reduced,  the  parts  remain  large  and 
swollen,  benefit  will  result  from  the  application  of  tincture  of  iodine, 
well  rubbed  in.  twice  a  day.  If  this  treatment  fails  to  restore  the 
parts  to  their  normal  condition  in  a  reasonable  length  of  time,  a 
blister  should  be  applied,  it  is  made  as  follows:  Cantharides  (pow- 
dered) 1  part,  cosmoline  4  to  5  parts;  or,  cantharides  (powdered)  1 
part,  biniodide  mercury  1  part,  cosmoline  4  to  <">  parts. 

Before  applying  either  the  blister  or  the  iodine  the  hair  should  be 
clipped  from  the  parts  to  which  the  medicine  is  to  be  applied.     To 


WOUNDS,  SPRAINS,  BRUISES,  ABRASIONS,   AND   ABSCESSES.  55 

obtain  the  best  results  from  the  blister  it  should  be  well  rubbed  in 
for  at  least  fifteen  minutes.  The  animal  must  be  tied  in  such  a 
manner  that  he  can  not  reach  the  blistered  part  with  his  mouth;  the 
blister  should  be  left  on  for  a  period  of  twenty-four  to  forty-eight 
hours;  it  must  then  be  removed  by  washing  with  warm  water  and 
castile  soap.  After  the  blister  has  been  removed  the  animal  may  be 
untied.  The  parts  should  be  kept  clean,  free  from  scabs,  and  soft 
from  the  use  of  cosmoline,  olive  oil,  or  glycerin. 

Rest  is  necessary  throughout  the  treatment,  and  even  to  test  his 
soundness  the  animal  should  not  be  moved  more  than  is  necessary. 

If  the  disease  does  not  yield  to  blisters,  the  parts  must  be  fired. 
For  this  operation,  two  kinds  of  instruments  are  used:  The  thermo- 
cautery, which  generates  its  own  heat,  and  the  more  common  form, 
the  iron  heated  in  the  fire.  Two  methods  of  firing  are  in  general  use: 
Line  firing,  for  diseases  of  the  tendons,  ligaments,  etc.  (Plate  X, 
Fig.  4),  and  puncture  firing,  for  diseases  of  the  bone  (Chapter  XI). 

BRUISES. 

In  the  cavalry  horse  the  most  frequent  bruises  are  saddle  and 
cinch  galls,  and  bruises  of  the  withers. 

Certain  horses  suffer  more  than  others,  on  account  of  the  presence 
of  old  sores,  scars,  or  scabs,  or  because  of  peculiarities  in  conformation. 

The  principal  defects  in  conformation  (previously  noted)  are: 
Abnormally  high  or  abnormally  low  and  thick  withers;  the  keel- 
shaped  breast,  accompanied  by  flat  ribs  and  light  flanks,  and  the 
broad  or  bulging  barrel. 

Old  horses  sometimes  have  the  muscles  in  the  saddle  bed  atrophied, 
and  are  therefore  more  liable  to  contract  saddle  galls. 

All  horses,  whatever  their  conformation,  are  subject  to  saddle  and 
cinch  galls,  produced  mechanically  by  three  causes:  First,  unequal 
distribution  of  weight;  second,  faults  in  saddling  and  cinching; 
third,  poor  riding. 

After  a  long  ride,  the  blood  vessels  under  the  saddle  and  cinch  are 
compressed  and  almost  empty.  If  it  is  suspected  that  saddle  or 
cinch  galls  may  have  been  formed,  it  is  advisable  to  leave  the  saddle 
on  for  a  half  hour  to  an  hour  after  dismounting;  the  cinch  should  be 
loosened  very  slightly. 

If  pressure  be  suddenly  and  completely  removed,  blood  is  vigor- 
ously forced  into  the  paralyzed  vessels,  and  may  rupture  their  walls. 
On  the  other  hand,  if  the  saddle  is  allowed  to  remain  some  time  in 
position,  circulation  is  gradually  restored  without  injury. 

Treatment. — As  soon  as  a  swelling  is  noticed,  application  of  cold  in 
the  form  of  pads  kept  saturated  with  cold  water  and  massage  in  the 
form  of  gentle  stroking  with  the  fingers  will  aid  in  the  absorption  of 
the  fluids  causing  the  swelling. 


56  THE  ARMY    EOBSE    IN    ACCIDENT  AND  DISEASE. 

Injuries  to  the  withers  require  different  treatment  cold  applica- 
tions without  pressure  and  without  massage,  on  account  of  the  danger 
of  the  Quids  burrowing. 

A  solution  made  of  the  following  is  a  very  good  application  for 
bruises:  Sugar  of  lead  2  ounces,  laudanum  4  ounces,  water  to  make 
1  quart.  To  be  applied  several  times  daily.  Or  a  poultice  made  of 
flaxseed  meal,  to  which  has  been  added  an  antiseptic,  such  as  creolin, 
carbolic  acid,  etc. 

Bruises  caused  by  kicks  or  running  against  an  obstacle  should  be 
treated  by  applications  of  water,  and  if  painful,  an  anodyne  (pain 
reducing)  liniment.  The  following  makes  a  good  anodyne:  Witch- 
hazel  2  parts,  tincture  opium  1  part,  tincture  aconite  \  part,  water  2 
parts.     Apply  locally  with  the  hand. 

Artillery  horses  are  subject  to  the  same  injuries,  produced  by  the 
saddle  and  cinch,  as  are  cavalry  horses,  and,  in  addition,  may  be 
bruised  about  the  neck  and  shoulders  by  the  collar.  If  the  collar  has 
not  broken  or  chafed  the  skin  (see  '"Abrasions")  treat  the  bruises  as 
previously  directed. 

The  white  lotion,  composed  of  1  ounce  each  of  sugar  of  lead  and 
sulphate  of  zinc,  water  1  quart,  is  a  most  excellent  remedy  for  bruises 
and  also  for  abrasions. 

Bruises  of  the  sole  and  heel. 

These  are  quite  frequent,  and  should  be  treated  by  hot  or  cold 
applications,  accomplished  by  holding  the  foot  in  a  tub  or  pail  of 
water,  or  b}T  incasing  the  foot  in  a  hot  flaxseed-meal  poultice.  If  pus 
forms,  the  underrun  horn  must  be  removed  and  the  parts  kept  clean 

and  covered. 

Capped  elbow — shoe  boil. 

This  is  a  bruise  at  the  point  of  the  elbow,  and  is  caused  by  the  horse 
lying  on  the  heels  of  his  shoe;  to  prevent  further  injury,  place  a  large 
roll  around  the  pastern  at  night,  and  apply  tincture  of  iodine  twice 
daily,  until  the  swelling  is  removed.  In  case  of  great  swelling  and 
heat,  apply  hot  and  cold  water,  or  the  white  lotion,  until  the  heat 
disappears;  then  proceed  as  above. 

<  'apped  hock. 

(  Chile  X,  Fig.  5.) 

Capped  hock  is  a  swelling,  more  or  less  soft,  found  on  the  point  of 
the  hock,  and  usually  caused  by  kicking  in  the  stall,  or  by  bruising 
the  parts  during  transportation  by  rail  or  sea.  Tincture  of  iodine  is 
a  very  good  remedy  for  this  injury. 

Only  in  extreme  cases  is  it  advisable  to  use  the  knife  in  the  treat- 
ment of  shoe  boils  and  capped  hock.     As  soon  as  the  parts  are  opened 


PLATE  XI. 


Fig.  1 ,  Fistulous  withers.    Fig.  2,  Poll  evil. 


WOUNDS,   SPRAINS,   BRUISES,  ABRASIONS,   AND   ABSCESSES.  57 

pus  rapidly  forms,  and  the  inflammation  (infection  by  germs)  may 
extend  to  the  inner  structures,  causing  a  condition  that  will  not 
readily  yield  to  treatment. 

Sitfast. 

Sitfasts  are  patches  of  dry,  dead  skin,  and  may  involve  the  deeper 
tissues;  they  are  caused  by  continuous  pressure  of  the  saddle,  cinch, 
or  collar,  and  may  be  situated  on  the  side  of  the  body,  back,  side  of 
withers,  shoulder,  or  neck. 

Treatment. — With  the  knife  remove  all  dead  and  bruised  tissue, 
stimulate  the  sore  at  the  sides  by  the  use  of  lunar  caustic,  and  treat 
as  a  common  wound.  When  there  is  no  more  formation  of  pus,  and 
the  parts  are  perfectly  dry,  do  not  apply  liquids,  but  use  iodoform 
until  well. 

Fistulous  withers. 

(Plate  XI,  Fig.  1.) 

Fistulous  withers  is  an  abscess  (gathering)  having  a  more  or  less 
chronic  discharge  of  pus  from  one  or  more  openings  situated  in  the 
immediate  vicinity  of  the  withers;  it  may  involve  only  the  soft  struc- 
tures, or  the  bones  may  also  be  affected;  it  is  caused  by  a  bruise,  and 
generally,  in  the  army,  by  a  bruise  from  an  ill-fitting  saddle. 

Treatment. — Treat  as  explained  under  "Abscesses."  If,  after  a 
reasonable  length  of  time,  results  are  not  satisfactory,  a  surgical  opera- 
tion is  necessary. 

Poll  evil. 

(Plate  XI,  Fig.  2.) 

Poll  evil  is  the  result  of  a  bruise  on  the  poll.  It  is  similar  to  fistulous 
withers,  and  should  receive  the  same  treatment. 

ABRASIONS. 

Aii  abrasion,  or  chafe,  is  an  inflammation  of  the  skin,  resulting 
from  friction.  Parts  of  the  equipment  frequently  wear  away  the 
hair  and  leave  the  skin  raw  and  tender. 

Treatment. — One  ounce  of  tannic  acid  in  a  pint  of  witchhazel  is 
especially  valuable  for  collar  chafes;  zinc  oxide  as  a  dusting  powder  is 
effective,  and  the  white  lotion  is  always  beneficial.  In  emergencies, 
bat  he  t  he  parts  with  cold  water  to  which  a  little  salt  has  been  added. 

Rope  burn. 

Rope  burn  is  an  abrasion,  usually  at  the  back  of  the  pastern,  and 
caused  by  the  animal  becoming  entangled  in  the  halter  shank,  picket 
line,  or  lariat.     The  injury  may  be  simply  a  chafe  of  the  superficial 


58  THE  ABMT    HORSE   IN    ACCIDENT   AND   DISEASE. 

layer  of  t  be  skin  or  it  may  involve  the  deeper  structures.     In  the  latter 
case  it  is  of  a  serious  nature  and  requires  careful  attention. 

Treatment. — If  possible,  give  the  animal  complete  rest.  Clip  the 
hair  from  t  he  injured  parts,  at  the  same  time  removing  any  torn  skin; 
wash  wit  h  some  good  antiseptic,  such  as  solid  ion  of  creolin  or  carbolic 
acid,  and  apply  a  dusting  powder,  such  as  zinc  oxide  or  iodoform,  the 
former  preferably.  Apply  a  pad  of  clean  cotton  and  secure  with  a 
cotton  bandage;  change  the  dressing  daily.  Should  the  parts  be  slow 
in  healing,  an  occasional  dressing  of  tincture  of  iodine  is  beneficial,  and 
good  results  are  often  obtained  by  alternating  this  with  a  dressing  of 
olive  oil  .'!  parts  and  creolin  2  parts.  Should  proud  flesh  appear,  the 
three  sulphates  (iron,  copper,  and  zinc)  may  be  used,  or  powdered 
copper  sulphate  alone.  Use  until  the  granules  disappear.  When  the 
wound  begins  to  heal  nicely,  it  is  better  to  dispense  with  the  pad  and 
bandage. 

ABSCESSES. 

An  abscess  is  an  unnatural  collection,  in  the  tissues,  of  fluids, 
such  as  pus  or  serum.  It  is  the  result  of  inflammation  caused  by 
an  injury  or  by  the  infection  of  pus  germs.  The  swelling  usually 
softens  at  some  point,  unless  it  be  filled  with  serum,  in  which  case  it 
is  soft  and  fluctuates  at  all  points,  and  lies  directly  beneath  the  skin. 
Soft,  puffy  swellings  in  the  neighborhood  of  joints  and  tendons 
should  not  be  mistaken  for  abscesses,  as  they  are  usually  bursal 
enlargements,  filled  with  synovia,  and  requiring  different  treatment. 
(See  "General  treatment  of  sprains.") 

Treatment — A  pus  abscess,  if  slow  in  development,  should  be 
poulticed  until  it  softens  at  some  part  where  it  can  be  opened  by 
cutting  through  the  skin;  then  insert  a  blunt  instrument  through 
the  wall  into  the  pus  cavity,  thus  avoiding  any  danger  of  injury 
to  blood  vessels  or  other  structures.  When  freely  opened,  the 
cavity  should  be  Hushed  out  twice  daily  with  some  antiseptic  solution, 
care  being  exercised  to  prevent  the  external  wound  from  healing 
before  the  formation  of  the  pus  has  ceased.  In  every  case  provision 
must  be  made  for  free  drainage  at  the  lowest  point. 

A  serous  abscess  (one  in  which  we  find  the  yellowish,  watery. 
and  often  bloody  serum)  is  treated  as  follows:  Clip  the  hair  away 
and  wash  the  skin  with  an  antiseptic:  with  an  instrument  that  has 
been  thoroughly  disinfected  make  a  small  opening;  after  all  fluid 
has  escaped  apply  a  blister  of  biniodide  of  mercury,  I  to  (>.  over  the 
outside  of  the  area  occupied  by  the  original  swelling.  If  it  fills  again, 
repeat   1  he  treat  meilt. 

Soft,  puffy  swellings  on  the  abdominal  wall  must  be  carefully 
examined.  They  may  be  the  results  of  rupture,  in  which  case  open- 
ing would  be  fatal. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


DISEASES  OF  THE  RESPIRATORY  SYSTEM  AND  INFLUENZA. 

ACUTE    NASAL    CATARRH. 

Acute  nasal  catarrh  (simple  cold  in  the  head)  is  usually  caused 
by  standing  in  a  draft,  and  may  be  detected  by  the  discharge  from 
the  nostrils.  It  is  usually  accompanied  by  a  cough,  loss  of  appetite 
and  elevation  of  temperature  (fever).  The  discharge  is  at  first  of 
the  consistency  of  water,  but  ma}"  in  severe  cases  become  much 
thicker,  and  form  dry  crusts  on  the  edges  of  the  nostrils. 

Treatment. — The  mild  form  does  not  require  treatment;  it  ends 
rapidly  in  a  cure.  In  severe  cases,  the  animal  should  have  complete 
rest ;  fumigation  (steaming)  from  a  hot  solution  of  creolin  or  carbolic 
acid  (1  ounce  to  A  pail  of  hot  water)  constitutes  an  excellent  local 
treatment.  Give  bran  mashes,  and  administer  twice  daily  \  ounce 
of  saltpeter,  or  2  drams  of  chloride  of  ammonia,  until  the  animal  has 
recovered;  the  chloride  of  ammonia  is  best  administered  on  the 
tongue.  If  the  cough  is  frequent  and  the  horse  has  difficulty  in 
swallowing,  the  following  liniment  should  be  applied  to  the  throat: 
Solution  of  ammonia  1  part,  oil  of  turpentine  1  part,  olive  oil  2  parts. 
Apply  twice  daily. 

CHRONIC    NASAL    CATARRH. 

Chronic  nasal  catarrh  is  usually  an  unfavorable  termination  of 
simple  catarrh;  or  it  may  result  from  injury  and  chronic  inflammation 
of  the  nasal  cavities;  from  tumors,  parasites,  abscesses,  etc.,  in  the 
nasal  cavities;  from  diseases  of  the  teeth;  from  chronic  diseases  of 
the  respiratory  (breathing)  apparatus  in  general;  and  from  chronic 
constitutional  diseases. 

Symptoms. — The  discharge  is  quite  thick  and  becomes  glued  to 
the  sides  of  the  nostrils;  its  color  varies  from  a  dirty  white  to  a 
yellowish  gray;  it  frequently  has  a  fetid  (foul)  odor;  the  quantity 
varies;  the  discharge  is  usually  from  one  nostril,  but  both  may  be 
affected;  incases  of  longstanding  small  ulcers  (sores)  may  occasionally 
be  seen  in  the  nostrils;  they  are  superficial  (on  the  surface),  are  de- 
fined by  sharp  edges  that  are  not  thickened,  and  heal  without  leaving 

59 


60  THE   AII.V1V    HORSE   IN   ACCIDENT   AND    DISEASE. 

a  scar.  (The  ulcer  of  glanders,  which  will  be  studied  later,  has  edges 
shaped  like  saw  teeth,  and  when  healed  leaves  a  jagged  scar.) 

Treatment. — Is  usually  local  and  as  follows:  Fumigation  with  hot 
water,  to  which  antiseptics  have  been  added  (2  ounces  of  creolin  or 
2  ounces  of  carbolic  acid  to  a  half  bucketful  of  water);  the  steaming 
to  continue  at  least  one-half  hour  twice  daily.  W  no  definite  cause 
of  the  discharge  can  be  found,  good  results  may  be  obtained  by  admin- 
istering 2  drains  of  powdered  copper  sulphate  or  the  same  amount  of 
iron  sulphate,  in  the  food  or  in  a  ball,  once  daily.  In  most  eases, 
when  the  discharge  is  from  one  nostril  only,  an  operation  is  necessary 
to  effect  a  cure. 

As  the  symptoms  of  this  disease  are  so  similar  to  glanders,  the 
animal  should  be  isolated,  and  the  utensils,  such  as  buckets,  forks, 
brooms,  currycombs,  blankets,  etc.,  should  not  be  used  about  other 
horses,  until  by  the  use  of  mallein  (see  Glanders)  the  disease  has 
been  definitely  determined. 

PHARYNGITIS    AND    LARYNGITIS SORE    THROAT. 

Sore  throat  is  an  inflammation  of  the  lining  membrane  imme- 
diately in  the  rear  of  the  mouth  and  is  caused  by  irritating  medicines, 
by  bodies  bruising  the  tissues,  by  sudden  changes  in  the  temperature, 
and  by  infection. 

Symptoms. — Diminution  of  the  appetite,  cough,  stiffness  of  the 
head,  soreness  when  pressure  is  applied  to  the  throat,  a  considerable 
amount  of  mucus  and  saliva  in  the  mouth,  escaping  in  long,  trans- 
parent threads,  and  usually  a  profuse  thick  discharge  from  the  nose. 
Swallowing  of  liquids  is  painful;  they  are  ejected  through  the  nose, 
and  are  often  of  a  greenish  color  and  contain  quantities  of  food. 
Temperature  may  range  from  normal  to  106°  F.,  with  difficulty  in 
breathing. 

Treatment. — The  sick  animal  should  be  separated  from  the  healthy 
ones  and  placed  in  a  comfortable  box  stall,  free  from  drafts,  but 
well  ventilated,  and  should  be  given  green  food  or  very  fine  hay, 
steamed  oats,  bran,  or  gruel;  fresh  wTater  should  be  left  within  reach. 
Four  drams  of  either  ammonium  chloride  or  potassium  nitrate 
should  be  added  to  the  drinking  water. 

The  lips  and  nostrils  should  be  kept  perfectly  clean  and  the  mouth 
washed  frequently  with  fresh  water.  Cold  compresses  should  be 
used  if  the  parts  arc  hot,  tender,  and  painful.  In  a  mild  case,  use 
the  ammonia  liniment  as  in  acute  nasal  catarrh.  If  an  abscess  is 
likely  to  form,  poultices  of  linseed  meal  may  be  applied,  and  the 
abscess,  when  ready,  should  be  opened,  but  never  with  a  knife.  Cut 
through  tin'  skin  only  and  then  insert  a  blunt  instrument,  or  the  lin- 
ger, and  allow  the  pus  to  escape. 


DISEASES    OF   RESPIRATORY   SYSTEM   AND   INFLUENZA.  61 

If  the  animal  breathes  with  great  difficulty,  manifested  by  making 
a  loud,  wheezing  sound,  an  opening  should  be  made  in  his  windpipe 
and  the  edges  of  the  opening  held  apart  by  inserting  a  suture  in  each 
side,  tying  the  silk  ends  up  over  the  neck;  or  a  tube  may  be  inserted 
in  (he  opening.     This  operation  is  called  tracheotonn/. 

1'ht  sore-throat  yatient  should  never  be  drenched.  If  the  horse 
should  cough  while  taking  medicine  in  this  manner,  the  liquid  might 
enter  the  lungs  and  cause  pneumonia. 

Fever  may  be  combatted  by  cold-water  injections  into  the  rectum, 
1  to  2  gallons  at  a  time. 

STRANGLES,  COM  MOM  A'    GALLED    "DISTEMPER." 

Strangles  is  an  acute,  infections  disease,  and  usually  attacks  young 
horses. 

Symptoms. — The  disease  begins  with  a  high  fever,  ranging  from 
104°  to  106°;  a  discharge  from  the  nose,  at  first  watery,  rapidly 
becoming  thicker,  and  later  assuming  a  whitish-gray  or  greenish- 
yellow  color.  The  glands  below  the  lower  jaw  become  swollen,  hot, 
and  painful,  and  occasionally  there  is  soreness  of  the  throat  ;  loss  of 
appetite,  depression,  great  muscular  weakness,  and,  occasionally, 
swelling  of  the  hind  legs  follow.  Sometimes  a  swelling  may  be 
found  on  some  portion  of  the  windpipe  or  other  part  of  the  body. 

Treatment. — Separate  the  sick  animal  from  the  healthy  ones  and 
place  him  in  a  well- ventilated  stall,  free  from  drafts;  clean  the  nos- 
trils frequently;  clothe  the  body  according  to  the  season  of  the  year; 
apply  hot  poultices  to  the  abscess  several  times  daily,  and,  as  soon 
as  pus  is  formed,  open  and  wash  twice  daily. 

Give  easily  digested  food,  green  fodder,  roots,  or  slops  made  of 
bran  or  steamed  oats,  and  to  his  drinking  water  add  J  ounce  of  salt- 
peter; do  not  drench,  as  the  throat  in  many  cases  is  sore. 

PNEUMONIA. 

Pneumonia  is  an  inflammation  of  the  lung  structure,  and  usually 
runs  a  course  of  from  seven  to  ten  days. 

Among  the  external  causes  of  the  disease  are  to  be  particularly 
mentioned  excessive  exertion  and  cold;  also  carelessness  in  giving 
a  drench,  particularly  if  the  animal  has  a  sore  throat.  This  dis- 
ease frequently  follows  acute  nasal  catarrh,  sore  throat  or  strangles, 
and  may  accompany  influenza. 

Symptoms. — The  first  symptom  is  an  intense  fever  accompanied 
by  a  chill;  the  patient  shows  great  fatigue  and  muscular  weakness; 
temperature  ranges  from  103°  to  107°,  the  appetite  is  diminished, 
at  times  almost  wanting;  the  patient  is  constipated:  breathing  is 
rapid  and  difficult;  the  nostrils  are  much  dilated,  ami  expired  air  is 


62  THE    \i:MY    HORSE    IN    ACCIDENT    AND    DISEASE. 

warmer  than  usual;  the  cars  and  legs  arc  cold.  There  is  frequently 
a  rusty  red  or  rusty  yellow  discharge  from  the  nose.  The  animal 
remains  standing  constantly,  with  the  fore  legs  Bpread,  or  it  may  lie 

down  for  a  short  time  only;  a  cough  may  or  may  not  be  present. 

Treatment.  Great  care  should  he  given  to  the  diet;  in  order  to 
keep  up  his  strength,  give  any  food  that  the  animal  will  eat  steamed 
oat-,  carrots,  or  green  grass  if  possible,  gruel,  etc.  Place  him  in  a 
well-ventilated  box  stall  free  from  drafts,  and  clothe  the  body  and 
Legs  according  to  the  season  of  the  year;  warm  blankets  wrapped 
around  the  chest  if  the  weather  is  not  too  hot  will  be  of  advantage. 
In  warm  weather,  if  flies  are  troublesome,  a  thin  sheet  made  of  gunny 
sacks  should  be  placed -upon  the  animal.  Quinine  sulphate  1  dram, 
gentian  root  2  drams,  makes  a  good  tonic.  It  should  be  repeated 
three  times  daily. 

Cold  injections  into  the  rectum  will  reduce  the  fever. 

Alcohol,  4  to  5  ounces,  well  diluted,  should  be  given  as  a  drench, 
twice  daily,  and  potassium  nitrate,  £  ounce,  should  be  added  to  the 
drinking  water. 

In  the  first  stage  of  pneumonia  (called  congestion  of  the  lungs), 
caused  by  overexertion  of  the  animal  when  he  is  in  a  w  eakened  con- 
dition, the  disease  may  be  often  broken  up  by  the  use  of  stimulant-. 

HEAVES. 

Heaves  is  a  chronic  disease  of  the  lungs,  manifested  in  a  quick 
inspiration  and  a  double  expiration. 

Symptoms. — Cough  of  a  chronic  nature;  discharge  from  the  nostrils 
after  exertion;  characteristic  breathing,  as  described  above,  which  is 
aggravated  by  damp,  muggy  weather,  and  by  dusty,  coarse,  and  bulky 
fodder,  such  as  clover  hay  or  dirty  oats.  Climate  has  a  marked  influ- 
ence ;  in  high,  dry  altitudes  this  trouble  is  unknown. 

Treatment. — Always  water  before  feeding,  and  feed  more  grain  and 
less  hay.  The  food  must  be  clean,  should  be  moistened  before  feeding, 
and  the  bowels  should  be  kept  loosened  by  frequent  bran  mashes. 
Never  exercise  a  horse  with  heaves  just  after  feeding;  if  he  must 
accompany  the  organization,  feed  him  earlier  than  the  others. 

INFLUENZA     (PINK    EYE). 

Influenza  is  a  contagious  disease.  Jt  affects  first  the  respiratory 
tract,  but  also  involves  the  nerve  centers,  circulatory  system,  the 
lining  membranes  of  the  intestines,  and  the  eyes. 

Symptoms. — The  first  symptoms  are  loss  of  appetite,  depression 
and  weakness;  the  temperature  rises  rapidly  to  105°  or  107°  in  severe 
cases;  the  animal  holds  his  head  low  and  has  a  stupid  look;  he  staggers 
when  walking,  and  the  visible  mucous  membranes  are  of  a  yellowish 
tinsre. 


DISEASES   OE   RESPIRATORY   SYSTEM   AND   INFLUENZA.  63 

When  the  digestive  organs  are  affected,  colics  (gripes)  occur  fre- 
quently. In  the  beginning,  constipation  is  the  rule  and  the  dung  is 
coated  with  a  whitish-yellow,  mucus  layer;  later  diarrhea  occurs  and 
the  dung  is  doughy,  soft,  or  liquid.  The  eyelids  are  sometimes 
swollen  shut  and  are  hot  and  sensitive  to  the  touch.  The  legs  and 
sheath  are  sometimes  swollen  and  the  lower  portion  of  the  belly  may 
be  similarly  affected. 

Treatment. — Isolate  sick  animals  for  their  own  comfort  and  the 
safety  of  healthy  subjects,  as  influenza  is  usually  a  serious  disease. 
Give  quinine  sulphate  1  dram,  gentian  2  drams,  in  a  ball,  three  times 
daily;  add  ^  ounce  saltpeter  to  the  drinking  water  twice  daily.  The 
fever  may  be  reduced  by  rectal  injections  of  cold  water. 

Intestinal  troubles  may  be  relieved  by  the  administration  of  bicar- 
bonate of  soda  in  dram  doses  three  times  daily ;  if  pain  is  very  severe, 
2  drams  of  fluid  extract  of  cannabis  indica  may  be  given.  Bathe  the 
eyes,  if  swollen,  with  warm  water.  Good  nursing  and  laxative  food 
are  essential,  cold  water  being  kept  where  the  animal  can  help  himself. 
5417—09 5 


CHAPTEK  VII. 


DISEASES  OF  THE  DIGESTIVE,  URINARY,  NERVOUS,  AND  LYMPHATIC 

SYSTEMS. 

Diseases  of  the  Digestive  Systkm. 
spasmodic  colic — gripes. 

I  Plate  XII.  > 

Spasmodic  colic  is  a  painful  contraction  of  the  intestines.  The 
usual  scat  of  the  trouble  is  the  small  intestines,  and  it  is  usually 
caused  by  indigestible  or  chilled  food  or  drink,  and  frequently  by 
sudden  chilling  of  the  body. 

Symptoms. — The  suffering  is  very  violent  but  of  short  duration; 
the  spasms  appear  suddenly  and  disappear  with  the  same  rapidity. 
The  horse  paws,  stamps,  looks  around  at  his  flanks,  lies  dov  n  and 
rolls,  and  if  the  pain  is  very  severe,  sweats  profusely.  During  the 
attack  a  few  pellets  of  dung  may  be  passed,  and  attempts  to  pass 
urine  arc  frequently  made.  This  latter  symptom  has  misled  many 
persons  to  the  impression  that  the  disease  was  located  in  the  "urinary 
organs." 

Treatment. —  Place  the  animal  in  a  large,  well-bedded  stall  and 
give  the  following:  Cannabis  indica  2  to  4  drams,  aromatic  spirits 
ammonia  1  ounce,  water  to  make  1  pint.  Or,  fluid  extract  bella- 
donna 2  drams,  nitrous  ether  2  ounces,  water  to  make  1  pint.  Either 
one  of  these  prescriptions  can  be  giveD  at  one  dose  and  repeated  in 
three-quarters  of  an  hour.  If  the  animal  is  not  relieved  in  one  hour, 
pve  a  purgative  of  aloes  (physic  ball). 

"Warm-water  injections,  per  rectum,  are  often  of  advantage. 

FLATULENT    COLIC. 

Flatulent  colic  is  generally  due  to  the  animal  having  eaten  im- 
proper foods,  such  as  musty  oats,  sour  bran,  green  corn,  etc.,  which 
interfere  with  the  process  of  digestion  and  give  off  much  gas.  It  is 
sometimes  caused  merely  by  a  sudden  change  of  diet  from  oats  to 
corn.  This  trouble  is  also  frequently  observed  in  horses  that  have 
t  he  hahit  of  wind  sucking. 
64 


PLATE  XII 


Characteristic  symptoms  of  spasmodic  colic. 


OF  THE 

{    UNIVERSITY 


FOR 


DIGESTIVE,  URINARY,  NEBVOUS,  AND  LYMPHATIC   SYSTEMS.         65 

Si/m jitoms. — The  rapid  swelling  of  the  belly  constitutes  the  charac- 
teristic symptom.  The  abdomen  is  distended,  the  pain  is  not  so 
severe  as  in  spasmodic  colic,  but  more  constant.  With  the  increase 
of  swelling  the  breathing  becomes  more  difficult,  anxiety  and  rest- 
lessness are  shown,  walking  is  painful,  and  the  animal  staggers,  lies 
down  and  rolls,  but  only  for  a  short  time. 

Treatment. — Place  the  horse  in  a  large,  roomy  stall,  and  give  the 
following  drench:  Sulphuric  ether  2  ounces,  aromatic  spirits  of 
ammonia,  1  ounce,  fluid  extract  belladonna  '2  drams,  water  to  make 
1  pint.  Repeat  in  one  hour  if  necessary.  Should  the  animal  not 
be  relieved  after  the  second  dose,  administer  a  purgative.  Cold- 
water  injections  into  the  rectum  are  sometimes  of  advantage.  If 
the  abdomen  continues  to  distend  with  gas,  the  trocar  and  canula 
must  be  used.  This  is  an  instrument  for  puncturing  the  intestine, 
but  should  be  used  only  by  one  who  understands  the  operation. 
The  instrument,  as  well  as  the  seat  of  the  operation,  should  be  thor- 
oughly disinfected. 

ENTERITIS — INFLAMMATION    OF   THE    BOWELS. 

Cause.  —  This  disease  is  sometimes  due  to  the  action  of  cold : 
sudden  chilling  when  the  body  is  in  a  perspiring  condition,  the 
sw  allowing  of  very  cold  water,,  of  frozen  or  frost-covered  fodder, 
etc.  It  is  sometimes  a  complication  of  the  colics  and  is  frequently 
seen  as  a  result  of  impaction  or  twisting  of  the  bowels. 

Symptoms. — The  mucous  membrane  of  the  nose,  mouth,  and  eyes 
is  congested  and  reddened,  the  mouth  is  hot  and  dry.  Respiration 
is  increased,  pulse  is  hard  and  rapid,  temperature  is  elevated,  103° 
to  105°  F.  Colicky  pains  are  continuous;  the  horse  walks  about 
the  stall,  paws,  lies  down  carefully,  rolls,  and  tries  to  balance  himselj 
on  Ms  back.  As  a  rule  the  bowels  are  constipated,  but  when  this 
disease  is  due  to  irritating  foods  or  medicines  purgation  and  flatu- 
lency may  be  present. 

The  small,  hard  pulse;  high  temperature;  aged  and  anxious  appear- 
ance of  the  face:  continuous  pain,  which  is  increased  by  pressure 
upon  the  abdomen;  position  of  the  horse  when  down,  and  coldness 
of  the  ears  and  legs,  will  enable  anyone  to  diagnose  a  case  of  enteritis. 
When  mortification  (death)  of  the  bowels  sets  in.  all  pain  ceases  and 
the  animal  will  stand  quietly,  sometimes  for  several  hours.  Toward 
the  last  he  sighs,  breathes  hard,  staggers  and  pitches  about,  and 
dies  in  a  state  of  delirium. 

It  is  a  very  serious  disease  and  in  the  majority  of  cases  proves 
fatal.  Death  may  take  place  in  six  hours,  or  not  until  after  several 
days. 


66  CHE    ARMY      [ORSE    IX    ACCIDENT    AND    DISEASE. 

Treatment.  To  control  the  pain  give  large  doses  of  powdered 
opium,  Laudanum,  or  cannabis  indica. 

The  following  prescription  is  recommended:  Opium,  powdered,  2 
drams;  calomel,  J  dram.  Make  into  a  ball;  give  n<  once,  and  repeal 
in  one  or  two  hours  if  necessary.  Blankets  wrung  oul  in  hot  water 
and  applied  to  the  abdomen  are  sometimes  of  benefit,  but  to  obtain 
good  results  they  must  be  kept  hoi  for  several  hours. 

CHRONIC    INDIGESTION. 

Chronic  indigestion  is  a  chronic  catarrh  of  the  stomach  and  bowels, 
the  causes  of  which  are:  Irregularity  in  feeding  and  watering:  feeding 
when  the  animal  is  in  an  exhausted  condition;  imperfect  mastication 
and  incomplete  salivation  of  food  due  to  irregularities  of  the  grinding 
surfaces  of  the  molar  teeth;  and  food  of  a  poor  quality,  deficient  in 
nutriment. 

The  presence  of  worms  is  a  frequent  cause  of  this  disease. 

Symptoms. — Appetite  diminished  or  capricious  and  depraved,  fre- 
quent gaping,  constipation;  periodic  colics  are  frequently  observed, 
the  coat  is  rough  and  staring,  and  the  skin  is  tightly  adherent  to  the 
body,  the  condition  known  as  •'hidebound."  The  animal  has  an 
unthrifty  appearance  generally. 

Treatment. — Give  small  quantities  of  good,  nutritious,  and  well- 
salted  food  three  times  daily. 

The  water  should  be  pure  and  given  regularly. 

Regular  exercise  and  good  grooming  will  hasten  recovery,  by 
stimulating  the  skin  as  well  as  other  parts  of  the  body. 

If  the  appetite  is  diminished,  give  as  a  tonic:  Gentian  2  ounces,  iron 
sulphate  1  ounce,  mix  vomica  1^  ounces,  nitrate  potash  H  ounces. 
Mix.     Make  twelve  powders.     Give  one  powder  twice  a  day. 

Bicarbonate  of  soda  is  a  very  useful  medicine  to  counteract  the 
acidity  (sourness)  of  the  stomach.  Dose,  1  dram,  twice  a  day;  the 
doses  may  be  continued  for  several  days. 

If  intestinal  worms  are  the  exciting  cause,  they  must  be  removed, 
and  until  this  has  been  accomplished  the  animal  will  retain  its  un- 
thrifty condition  although  it  may  brighten  up  temporarily. 

The  following  prescription  is  recommended:  Spirits  turpentine  2 
ounces,  oil  linseed  4  ounces,  (live  before  feeding  and  repeal  once  a 
day  for  four  days;  then  follow  up  with  1  pint  of  linseed  oil. 

DIARRHEA. 

This  term  is  applied  to  all  cases  of  simple  purging  in  which  the 
feces  (dung)  are  loose,  liquid,  and  frequently  discharged. 

Diarrhea  may  be  a  spontaneous  effort  to  discharge  from  the  intes- 
tines something  which  is  obnoxious  to  them  or  to  the  system  gen- 


DIGESTIVE,   [JRINARY,   NERVOUS,  AND   LYMPHATIC  SYSTEMS.        67 

erally.     It  is  caused  by  various  agencies,  such  as  indigestible  food, 
sudden  change  of  diet — particularly  from   a   dry  to  a  moist  one 
medicinal   substances,    worms,   derangement    of   the   liver,   or   large 

drafts  of  water  when  the  animal  is  heated.  Some  animals  are  par- 
ticularly predisposed  to  diarrhea  from  trivial  causes.  Narrow-loined, 
flat-sided,  and  loosely  coupled  horses — that  is  to  say,  horses  in  which 
the  distance  between  the  point  of  the  hip  and  last  rib  is  long — and 
those  of  a  nervous  temperament  are  apt  to  purge  without  apparent 
cause.  These  are  called  washy  horses.  They  are  hard  to  keep  in 
condition  and  require  the  best  of  food. 

Symptoms. — Purging,  the  fecal  matter  being  semifluid,  of  a  dirty- 
brown  color,  without  offensive  odor,  or  clay-colored  and  fetid.  If  the 
condition  continues  long  the  animal  loses  flesh  and  the  appetite  is 
wanting. 

Treatment. — When  the  purging  arises  from  the  presence  of  some 
offending  matter  in  the  intestinal  canal  (sand,  worms,  undigested 
food,  etc.)  its  expulsion  must  be  aided  by  a  moderate  dose  of  linseed 
oil  (H  pints). 

If  the  purging  arises  from  no  apparent  cause,  or  if  the  bowels  do  not 
regain  their  normal  condition  after  the  action  of  the  oil  has  subsided, 
it  will  be  necessary  to  give  astringents  (binding  medicines),  such  as 
tannic  acid,  1  to  2  drams.  The  following  prescription  may  also  be 
used:  Gum  camphor  1  ounce,  opium,  powdered,  1  ounce.  Mix. 
Make  eight  powders  and  give  one  powder  every  three  or  four  hours, 
according  to  the  severity  of  the  case.  Great  care  must  be  exercised, 
as  evil  results  may  follow  if  the  bowels  are  checked  too  soon. 

Diseases  of  the  Urinary  System. 

acute  nephritis — inflammation  of  the  kidneys. 

Causes. — It  is  at  times  produced  by  the  action  of  cold;  it  also 
happens  frequently  in  the  course  of  infectious  (catching)  diseases. 
The  kidneys  become  irritated  by  the  presence  of  waste  materials  of 
the  food,  such  as  mold,  rust,  etc.,  or  by  the  passage  of  certain  medi- 
cines, such  as  turpentine,  cantharides,  etc.  Inflammation  and  partial 
or  total  clogging  of  the  organ  results.  Cantharides  will  reach  the 
kidneys  after  absorption  from  a  large  blistered  surface. 

Symptoms. — The  most  important  and  often  the  only  manifesta- 
tions of  nephritis  (in  the  course  of  infectious  diseases,  for  instance) 
are  furnished  by  the  urine.  Its  quantity  is  diminished;  it  is  thick- 
ened; of  abnormal  color;  occasionally  it  is  the  color  of  blood.  Mic- 
turition (pissing)  is  painful;  the  urine  often  runs  off  drop  by  drop 
only,  notwithstanding  the  violent  efforts  made  by  the  patient.  In 
serious  eases  the  urinary  secretion  may  be  completely  suppressed. 


68  THE    Al;MY    HORSE    IN    ACCIDENT   AND    DISEASE. 

The  lumbar  region  is  very  sensitive  to  the  pressure  of  the  hand. 
At  the  beginning  of  the  disease  we  often  have  renal  or  kidney  colics. 
The  hack  is  arched,  the  gait  stiff  and  staggering,  rising  is  painful;  the 
animal  remains  almost  constantly  standing.  The  appetite  may  be 
lost.  The  temperature  is  elevated;  in  some  eases  it  may  range  very 
high. 

Treatment. — Remove  the  cause  if  possible;  avoid  all  irritating 
food  or  medicines,  and  give  absolute  rest.  Try  to  induce  sweating 
by  energetic  rubbings  upon  the  surface  of  the  whole  body;  also  by 
warm  blankets,  and  wet,  tepid  compresses  applied  upon  the  Loins- 
Give  the  following  physic:  Aloes  6  drams,  calomel  1  dram,  ginger  1 
dram.  Make  into  a  ball  and  give  at  one  dose.  It  has  a  most  favor- 
able action,  because  the  purging  draws  a  large  quantity  of  water  from 
the  system. 

If  there  is  a  total  suppression  of  urine,  h  ounce  of  fluid  extract 
digitalis,  well  rubbed  in  on  each  side  of  the  loins  over  the  kidneys, 
will  have  a  beneficial  effect  by  stimulating  the  kidneys  without  caus- 
ing irritation.     This  application  should  not  be  used  more  than  once. 

DIABETES    INSIPIDUS SIMPLE    DIABETES    (PISSING). 

A  disease  characterized  by  great  thirst,  excessive  urination,  and 
great  languor  and  emaciation. 

In  the  majority  of  cases  it  is  caused  by  poor  and  tainted  food.  In 
some  cases  it  seems  to  be  due  to  a  constitutional  cause. 

Symptoms. — Excessive  urination,  from  6  to  12  gallons  every  twenty- 
four  hours;  great  thirst,  the  animal  sometimes  drinking  from  20  to 
25  gallons  of  water  in  twenty-four  hours;  depraved  appetite;  urine 
of  a  very  pale  eolor,  sometimes  as  clear  as  water;  the  skin  is  harsh 
and  the  coat  is  unhealthy  looking. 

Treatment. — Give  good,  clean,  and  nutritious  food.  Administer 
iodine  in  1-dram  doses  three  times  a  day  and  diminish  quantity  as 
the  thirst  is  lessened  and  the  urine  is  diminished. 

RETENTION    OP    THE    URINE. 

An  inability,  total  or  partial,  to  expel  by  natural  effort  the  urine 
contained  in  the  bladder.  It  is  caused  by  spasm  of  the  neck  of  the 
bladder,  and  is  often  a  complication  of  colic. 

Symptoms.— Frequent  and  ineffectual  attempts  to  urinate:  if 
standing  the  animal  will  stretch  himself  out,  strain  violently,  and 
groan  with  pain,  discharging  but  a  few  drops  of  urine,  or  none  at  all: 
by  examination  per  rectum  the  bladder  is  felt  to  be  greatly  distended, 
and  this  is  the  diagnostic  or  distinguishing  symptom. 

Treatrru  nt. — Pass  the  catheter  and  draw  off  the  urine.  If  retention 
of  the  urine  is  due  to  an  accumulation  of  dirt  in  the  penis,  washing 
will  remove  the  cause. 


digestive,  urinary,  nervous,  and  lymphatic  systems.      69 
Diseases  of  the  Nervous  System. 
congestion  of  the   brain     "blind  staggers." 

This  disease  is  caused  by  an  accumulation  of  blood  in  the  vessels 

of  the  brain,  due  to  some  obstacle  to  its  return  to  the  veins. 

Cause*.— Disease  of  the  heart;  excessive  exertion;  the  influence 
of  extreme  heat;  sudden  and  great  excitement;  artificial  stimulants; 
any  mechanical  obstruction  which  prevents  the  return  of  blood 
through  the  veins  to  the  heart,  such  as  a  small  ill-fitting  collar; 
tumors  or  abscesses  pressing  on  the  vein  in  its  course;  extreme  fat; 
compression  of  the  vascular  structures  (arterial  capillaries)  by  an 
abnormal  tension  of  gas  in  the  stomach  and  intestines;  over-feeding 
after  a  prolonged  abstinence  or  when  the  exercise  is  insufficient :  and 
foods  difficult  of  digestion.  Fat  horses  or  those  with  short,  thick 
necks  are  especially  liable  to  attacks  of  this  malady. 

Symptoms.—  Congestion  of  the  brain  usually  appears  suddenly  and 
is  of  short  duration. 

The  animal  may  stop  very  suddenly  and  shake  his  head,  or  stand 
quietly  braced  on  his  legs,  then  stagger,  make  a  plunge  and  fall;  the 
eves  are  staring,  breathing  hurried  and  snoring,  nostrils  widely 
dilated;  this  may  be  followed  by  coma  (insensibility),  violent  con- 
vulsive movement,  and  death. 

Generally,  however,  the  animal  gains  relief  in  a  short  time,  but  he 
may  remain  weak  and  giddy  for  several  days.  If  it  is  due  to  organic 
change  in  the  heart  or  disease  of  the  blood  vessels  in  the  brain  the 
symptoms  may  be  of  slow  development,  manifested  by  drowsiness, 
diminished  or  impaired  vision,  difficulty  in  voluntary  movements, 
diminished  sensibility  of  the  skin,  loss  of  consciousness,  delirium,  and 
death.  * 

Treatment. — Prompt  removal  of  all  mechanical  obstruction  to  the 
circulation.  If  it  is  due  to  venous  obstruction  by  too  tight  a  collar, 
the  loosening  of  the  collar  will  give  immediate  relief.  If  due  to  tu- 
mors or  abscesses,  a  surgical  operation  becomes  necessary.  To  re- 
lieve the  animal,  if  he  becomes  partially  or  totally  unconscious,  cold 
water  should  be  dashed  on  the  head,  and  if  this  does  not  afford  relief, 
recourse  must  be  had  to  bleeding  to  lessen  arterial  tension.  If  symp- 
toms <>f  paralysis  remain  after  two  or  three  days,  an  active  physic 
should  be  given,  followed,  after  twenty-four  hours,  by  iodide  of 
potassium  given  in  2-dram  doses  three  times  daily.  Place  the  animal 
in  a  cool,  dark,  well-ventilated  stable,  keep  him  perfectly  quiet,  and 
give  cooling  diet. 


70  Till      \i;.MY    HORSE    IX    ACCIDENT    AND    DISEASE. 

SUNSTROKE  AND   BEATSTROKE. 

These  are  cerebral  troubles:  Sunstroke  is  produced  by  the  rays  of 
the  sun  falling  directly  upon  the  cranium.  Heatstroke  is  caused  by 
the  overheating  of  the  whole  body  or  by  excessive  exertion. 

Symptoms. — Sunstroke  is  manifested  suddenly:  the  animal  stops, 
drops  his  head,  begins  to  stagger,  the  breathing  is  marked  by  great 
snoring,  the  pulse  is  very  slow  and  irregular,  cold  sweats  break  out  in 
patches  on  the  surface  of  t  he  body,  and  the  animal  often  dies  without 
recovering  consciousness. 

In  heatstroke  the  animal  usually  requires  urging  for  some  time  pre- 
vious to  the  appearance  of  any  other  symptom.  Generally  perspi- 
ration is  checked;  he  becomes  weak  in  his  gait;  the  breathing  grows 
hurried  or  panting;  the  eyes  watery  and  bloodshot;  nostrils  dilated 
and  highly  reddened  to  a  dark  purple  color;  the  pulse  is  rapid  and 
weak;  the  heart  bounding,  frequently  followed  by  unconsciousness 
and  death.  Temperature  reaches  107°  to  112°  F.  If  recovery  takes 
place  convalesence  extends  over  a  long  period  of  time,  during  which 
locomotion  shows  lack  of  full  control. 

Treatment. — The  treatment  consists  in  the  application  of  cold  in 
the  form  of  ice  or  cold  water  on  the  head,  cold  injections  per  rectum, 
and  the  administration  of  stimulants,  such  as  2  ounces  aromatic  spirits 
of  ammonia  or  4  ounces  of  alcohol  in  8  ounces  of  water;  repeat  in  one 
hour  if  necessary.  Place  the  animal  in  a  cool  and  shady  place,  and 
hat  he  the  whole  body  with  cold  water  until  the  temperature  is  lowered. 

Diseases  of  the  Lymphatic  System. 

Acute  inflammation  of  the  lymph  gland  usually  occurs  in  connection 
with  some  inflammatory  process  in  the  region  from  which  the  lymph 
is  gathered. 

The  lymph  glands  between  the  branches  of  the  lower  jaw  almost 
invariably  become  affected  in  strangles,  nasal  catarrh  (acute  or 
chronic),  diseased  or  ulcerated  teeth.  Infected  wounds  of  any  pari 
of  the  body  may  cause  inflammation  of  the  neighboring  Lymphatics. 

Symptoms. — The  glands  swell  and  become  painful  to  the  touch,  the 
connective  tissue  surrounding  them  becomes  involved,  suppuration 
(formation  of  pus)  usually  takes  place,  and  one  or  more  abscesses 
form.  If  the  inflammation  is  of  a  milder  type  the  swelling  may  dis- 
appear and  the  gland  will  assume  its  normal  condition  without  sup- 
puration. The  temperature  will  be  elevated.  Sometimes  the  glands 
will  remain  hard  and  considerably  swollen  for  some  length  of  time. 
In  man  these  swollen  glands  are  known  as  kernels. 

Treatment. — Fomentations  with  hot  water  will  relieve  the  soreness, 
unless  an  abscess  is  forming.  If  such  is  known  to  be  the  case  a.  poul- 
t  ice  of  bran  or  flaxseed  meal  should  be  applied,  and  as  BOOD  as  fluctua- 


PLATE  XIII. 


Lymphangitis. 


DIGESTIVE,  URINARY,  NERVOUS,  AND  LYMPHATIC  SYSTEMS.         71 

tion  can  be  felt  a  free  opening  must  be  made  and  the  abscess  washed 
with  a  solution  of  bichloride  mercury  1-1000,  or  creolin  1-50.  If  the 
gland  does  not  suppurate,  the  enlargement  may  be  reduced  by  tinc- 
ture of  iodine  applied  twice  daily. 

LYMPHANGITIS. 

(Plate  XIII.) 

Inflammation  of  the  lymphatic  structures,  usually  affecting  the 
hind  leg,  very  seldom  the  fore  leg.  This  disease  is  very  sudden  in  its 
attack,  exceedingly  painful,  accompanied  by  a,  high  temperature  and 
great  general  disturbance. 

Causes. — It  usually  attacks  well-fed  animals,  especially  after  one 
or  two  days'  rest,  and  in  such  cases  may  be  due  to  an  excess  of  nu- 
tritious elements  in  the  blood.  It  may  also  result  from  an  infected 
wound. 

Symptoms. — The  first  symptom  noticed  will  be  lameness  in  one  leg 
and  swelling  on  the  inside  of  the  thigh.  The  swelling  gradually  sur- 
rounds the  whole  limb,  continuing  downward  until  it  reaches  the 
foot.  The  limb  is  excessively  tender  to  the  touch  and  is  held  up. 
The  breathing  is  increased,  pulse  hard  and  quick  (80  to  100),  and  the 
temperature  may  reach  106°.  The  bowels  early  become  constipated 
and  the  urine  scanty  and  high  colored.  Occasionally  the  lymphatic 
glands  in  the  groin  undergo  suppuration,  blood  poisoning  may  super- 
vene and  prove  fatal. 

Treatment. — Fomentations  with  warm  water,  to  be  continued  for 
one  hour  and  repeated  several  times  daily.  Give  a  physic  composed 
of  6  to  8  drams  of  aloes,  1  dram  ginger,  and  water  to  make  a  ball. 
Give  at  once.  After  the  physic  has  operated  give  ^-ounce  doses  of 
nitrate  of  potash  twice  daily.  After  the  pain  diminishes,  moderate 
exercise  and  hand  rubbing  will  be  of  benefit.  If  the  glands  sup- 
purate, open,  and  wash  them  out  with  an  antiseptic.  The  irrigations 
must  be  continued  until  the  gland  is  well. 

If  caused  by  a  wound,  similar  treatment  should  be  pursued, 
together  with  thorough  disinfection  of  the  wound.  If,  after  one 
week,  the  swelling  still  remains,  give  potassium  iodide,  2  drams, 
twice  daily  until  it  is  reduced. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


MISCELLANEOUS   DISEASES. 

PURPURA    HEMORRHAGICA — PURPURA — PETECHIAL   FEVER. 

(Plate  XIV.  i 

This  is  an  acute,  infectious  disease,  the  cause  of  which  is  as  yet 
little  known.  Sometimes  it  is  primary;  in  other  instances  it  follows 
other  infectious  diseases,  strangles,  pharyngitis,  contagious  pneu- 
monia, influenza,  etc. 

Symptoms. — Petechial  fever  is  generally  manifested  by  the  appear- 
ance upon  the  mucous  membranes  of  numerous  dark-red  petechia 
(reddish  spots);  sometimes  they  are  insignificant  as  a  flea  bite,  then 
again  they  may  attain  the  size  of  a  pea  or  an  acorn;  they  often 
become  joined  and  form  spots  or  bands  of  variable  length.  In 
serious  cases  the  nasal  mucous  membrane  becomes  affected  by 
gangrene  (death  of  the  affected  spot)  or  covered  over  with  ulcera- 
tions. The  discharge  is  blood}^  and  of  bad  aspect,  breathing  is  very 
laborious,  and  the  expired  air  has  a  fetid  odor.  The  general  condi- 
tion sometimes  becomes  very  rapidly  aggravated;  then,  in  the 
majority  of  cases,  the  disease  ends  in  death. 

Corresponding  with  the  appearance  of  the  reddish  spots,  or  a  few 
days  later,  swellings  appear  beneath  the  skin;  this  symptom,  which 
is  the  'most  prominent,  is  often  the  first  symptom  noticed.  The 
swellings  will  range  in  size  from  a  ten-cent  piece  to  a  silver  dollar; 
they  are  usually  upon  dependent  regions,  such  as  the  head,  extremi- 
ties, abdomen,  sheath,  and  chest.  These  swellings  are  not  hot,  and 
only  slightly  sensitive:  they  gradually  extend  until  they  grow 
together,  and  we  have  in  a  few  hours  the  swelling  up  of  the  legs  and 
belly,  or  the  head,  to  an  enormous  size;  they  have  always  a  charac- 
teristic constricted  border,  which  looks  as  if  it  had  been  tied  with  a 
cord.  The  swelling  stands  out  abruptly  at  this  border,  often  as  much 
as  an  inch. 

The  swelling  in  the  legs  will  cause  stillness.  The  head  may  be 
swollen  to  such  a  size  that  it  resembles  the  head  of  a  hippopotamus 
rather  than  that  of  a  horse;  the  caliber  of  the  nostril  may  be  so  less- 
ened as  to  cause  the  horse  to  breathe  with  difficulty.  The  pulse,  if 
72 


PLATE  XIV. 


Purpura  hemorrhagica. 


MISCELLANEOUS   DISEASES.  73 

altered  at  all,  is  a  little  weaker  than  usual,  (he  appetite  remains 
normal  as  a  rule,  although  at  times  the  animal  will  have  difficulty  in 
mastication.  The  temperature  at  first  is  normal,  hut  in  a  few  days 
it  may  have  reached  102°,  103°,  or  104°. 

Over  the  surface  of  the  skin  covering  the  swollen  parts  we  find  a 
slight  serous  sweating,  which,  when  it  dries,  gives  the  appearance  of 
an  eruption  of  some  cutaneous  (skin  i  disease.  If  this  is  excessive  we 
may  see  irritated  spots,  followed  by  suppuration.  This  suppuration 
may  become  excessive  from  the  great  distention  and  loss  of  vitality 
of  the  skin. 

During  the  course  of  this  disease  colics  may  sometimes  occur; 
later  the  pulse  may  beat  60  to  80  times  per  minute;  the  dung  is 
ordinarily  coated. 

High  temperatures  indicate  complications. 

The  mortality  is  about  50  per  cent. 

Treatment.  -Place  the  patient  in  a  clean,  well-ventilated,  roomy 
box  stall,  andtie  the  head  up  high;  in  case  the  head  is  already  swollen, 
remove  the  halter  at  once  and  use  a  head  sling,  [f  necessary  to  blanket 
never  use  the  surcingle.  Give  soft  food,  clean  hay,  and  green  fodder. 
if  possible,  and  plenty  of  fresh  pure  water  to  drink. 

When  the  legs  and  parts  of  the  bod}'  are  covered  by  the  dried 
serum  the  surface  must  be  softened  by  the  application  of  cosmoline 
or  olive  oil,  to  which  may  be  added  a  small  amount  of  creolin  (1  to  51 ) ) 
or  of  carbolic  acid  (1  to  25). 

If  sloughing  has  taken  place,  the  sores  must  receive  surgical  atten- 
tion;  dead  tissue  must  be  removed  and  antiseptics  applied. 

If  the  animal  has  great  difficulty  in  breathing,  we  must  resort  to  the 
use  of  the  tracheotomy  tube. 

Try  to  sustain  the  strength  of  the  animal  and  give  tonics  to  increase 
the  appetite:  Tincture  of  chloride  of  iron  1  to  2  ounces  in  a  pint  of 
water,  or  iron  sulphate  2  drams,  quinine  1  dram:  either  dose  three 
times  daily. 

Spirits  of  turpentine,  3  ounces,  in  0  ounces  of  linseed  oil,  given 
twice  daily,  will  have  a  beneficial  effect  by  stimulating  the  heart  and 
kidneys.  Sponge  the  head,  where  swollen,  with  either  ice-cold  or 
very  warm  water:    repeat  this  several  times  daily. 

AZOTURIA. 

Azoturia  is  the  result  of  the  confinement  of  a  strong,  vigorous  horse 
for  several  days  in  a  badly  ventilated,  damp  stable,  where  he  receives 
full  rations  and  no  exercise,  followed  by  sudden  exposure  to  a  lower 
temperature.  It  is  not  a  disease  of  the  kidneys,  as  is  commonly 
supposed. 


74  Till'.   ARMY    HORSE    IX    ACCIDENT    AND   DISEASE. 

Symptoms. — These  consist  of  troubles  of  locomotion  (movement), 
which  appear  during  exercise  and  generally  within  a  quarter  to  half 
an  hour  after  starting. 

The  disease  begins  very  suddenly,  in  an  unusual  degree  of  restless- 
ness, with  profuse  perspiration;  these  symptoms  are  speedily  suc- 
ceeded by  a  desire  to  lie  down,  by  greal  sluggishness,  by  loss  of  mov- 
ing power  in  the  hind  limbs,  and  by  violent  spasms  of  the  large 
muscles  of  the  loins,  thighs,  and  hind  quarters.  The  affected  muscles 
arc  swollen  and  very  hard,  and  later  may  atrophy,  especially  those 
located  above  the  stifle.  If  the  animal  is  down,  he  makes  an  effort  to 
stand,  hut,  from  the  total  loss  of  power  in  the  hind  limbs,  is  unable 
to  rise. 

The  fore  limbs  and  shoulder  muscles  may  be  similarly  affected,  but 
in  this  ease  the  disease  is  less  severe. 

The  pulse  usually  becomes  rapid :  the  temperature  rarely  increases, 
even  in  the  grave  form:  the  appetite  is  seldom  diminished,  and.  ;;-  a 
ride,  the  animal  will  drink  large  quantities  of  water. 

The  urine  is  coffee-colored  and  is  generally  retained  in  the  bladder. 

Treatment. — As  soon  as  the  first  symptoms  are  noticed,  halt  at 
once.  Keep  the  animal  on  his  feet :  unsaddle  or  unharness  and  blanket 
promptly:  then  move  him  as  gently  as  possible  to  the  nearest  shelter, 
where  lie  must  have  complete  rest.  If  possible,  heat  some  common 
salt  or  some  oats:  place  in  a  sack  and  spread  over  the  loins  (under  the 
blanket),  to  relieve  the  pain.  Feed  only  good  hay  or  laxative  food 
and  avoid  oats  and  corn.  Encourage  the  horse  to  drink  as  much 
water  as  possible,  as  this  will  assist  the  kidneys  in  carrying  the 
poisonous  material  out  of  the  blood.  When  the  urine  clears,  the 
animal  may  be  gradually  returned  to  work. 

If  it  has  been  possible  to  reach  the  stables,  place  the  horse  in  a 
roomy  stall:  if  there  is  then  danger  of  his  lying  down,  use  the-  - 
pending  slings,  provided  he  is  able  to  partially  support  his  weight  on 
his  hind  legs:  then  give  2  ounces  of  sweet  spirits  of  niter  and  2  to  4 
drams  of  fluid  extract  of  cannabis  indica  in  a  pint  of  water.  In  a 
half  hour  administer  a  physic  ball. 

If  the  animal  has  dropped  on  the  road  and  is  unable  to  rise  he  must 
be  taken  to  the  stable  by  the  use  of  a  stone  boat  or  other  extempor- 
ized means:  plenty  of  bedding  must  then  be  supplied  and  the  patient 
frequently  turned  from  side  to  side:  apply  £  ounce  of  fluid  extract 
of  digitalis  to  the  loins  and  rub  in  well,  to  stimulate  the  action  of  the 
kidneys.  If  the  patient  has  retention  of  urine,  the  bladder  must  be 
emptied  several  times  daily:  this  can  be  accomplished  by  passing 
the  hand  into  the  rectum  and  applying  moderate  pressure  upon  the 
bladder,  or  by  the  introduction  of  the  catheter. 

This  disease  occurs  in  the  army  only  through  carelessness.  When 
the  horse  i-  left  resting  for  twentv-four  t<>  fortv-eiffht  hours  or  longer 


v^^v 


PLATE  XV. 


Farcy. 


MISCELLANEOUS   DISEASES.  75 

the  food  ration  should  be  diminished,  and  the  animal  must  be  given  a 
little  exercise  in  the  open  air  every  day  to  keep  him  accustomed  to 
the  outside  temperature. 

GLANDERS    AM)   FARCY. 

(danders  is  a  contagious  constitutional  disease  of  the  horse  and 
mule,  and  may  be  communicated  to  man.  The  disease  is  due  to  a 
germ  called  "  bacillus  mallei,"  and  affects  the  Schneiderian  membrane 
and  internal  organs. 

When  thedisease  is  located  in  the  lymphatic  glands  situated  on  the 
external  parts  of  the  body  it  is  called  farcy.     (Plate  XV.) 

(danders  and  farcy  are  one  and  the  same  disease. 

It  may  be  acute  or  chronic.  In  acute  glanders  the  bacilli  enter  the 
blood  and  the  disease  spreads  throughout  the  system. 

Chronic  glanders. 

The  beginning  of  chronic  glanders  is  often  hidden  from  view  and 
passes  unobserved. 

The  first  visible  symptom  is  generally  a  discharge  from  one  or  both 
nostrils  of  a  yellowish  green  matter  of  bad  aspect;  quite  frequently 
it  is  tinged  with  blood. 

Then  pimples  and  ulcers  are  observed  upon  the  Schneiderian  mem- 
brane. The  pimples  are  of  short  duration;  the}-  are  soon  transformed 
into  ulcers  more  or  less  deep,  with  sawtooth-shaped,  thickened  edges; 
these  may  heal,  but  will  always  leave  a  scar. 

The  enlargement  of  the  lymphatic  glands  situated  in  the  space 
between  the  lower  jaw  is  another  important  symptom.  In  the  be- 
ginning the  gland  is  a  little  sensitive,  slightly  doughy,  and  adheres  to 
the  base  of  the  tongue  or  to  the  lower  maxillae;  in  some  subjects  it 
adheres  to  the  skin.  In  exceptional  cases  the  enlargement  of  the 
gland  is  absent. 

The  general  health  of  the  animal  suffers  as  the  affection  progresses; 
emaciation  appears;  the  hair  becomes  dull  and  bristly. 

There  is  frequently  difficulty  in  breathing,  and  the  patient  becomes 
rapidly  fatigued. 

Farcy. 

Plate  XV. 

Farcy  is  more  rare  in  the  chronic  than  in  the  acute  form  of  the  dis- 
ease; its  favorite  regions  are  the  inner  side  of  the  extremities,  shoul- 
ders, neck,  chesl .  and  abdomen. 

The  pimples  and  tumors  vary  from  the  size  of  a  pea  to  that  of  a 
walnut,  or  larger;  they  suppurate  and  discharge  a  yellow,  sticky 
Liquid  of  bad  aspect.  They  rarely  heal,  and  if  they  do  a  jagged  seal- 
remains. 


76  THE   ARMY    HORSE    IX    ACCIDENT   AND    DISEASE. 

.  \(  iii<  glandt  rs. 

Symptoms.  Acute  glanders  is  rare  in  the  horse  (10  percent),  except 
in  transit  and  in  tropical  climates.  It  is,  on  the  contrary,  the  ordi- 
nary form  in  the  mule.  Sometimes  it  is  primary;  in  other  instances 
it  follows  the  chronic  form,  where  the  vitality  of  the  animal  has  been 
lessened  by  other  acute  affections. 

The  disease  produces  an  ulcerous  destruction  of  the  respiratory 
mucous  membrane,  and  also  involves  the  skin,  lungs,  and  other 
organs. 

It  begins  with  a  chill,  followed  by  intense  fever,  which  reaches  107° 
F.  A  sticky,  yellowish,  irritating,  bloody  nasal  discharge  appears. 
The  nasal  mucous  membrane  is  overrun  with  pimples  and  ulcers, 
which  rapidly  join  one  another;  they  may  perforate  the  septum  nasi. 
The  respiration  is  rattling,  wheezing,  and  moaning,  due  to  contrac- 
tion of  the  larynx;  to  these  symptoms  are  often  added  those  of  farcy. 
We  may  find  diarrhea.  The  patient  is  extremely  weak  and  emacia- 
tion progresses  rapidly. 

In  general,  acute  glanders  runs  a  rapid  course;  its  usual  termina- 
tion is  death.  This  ordinarily  takes  place  within  from  three  to  four- 
teen days. 

In  the  horse  there  is  no  disease  of  which  an  exact  diagnosis  is  so 
important  as  that  of  glanders. 

In  order  to  correctly  diagnose  obscure  cases  (those  with  no  out- 
ward symptoms)  we  must  resort  to  the  use  of  mallein.  This  is  a 
liquid,  the  injection  of  which  will  cause  a  reaction  (rise  in  tempera- 
ture) in  glandered  horses  apparently  enjoying  the  best  of  health. 

Treatment. — This  disease  is  not  only  contagious  to  horses,  mules, 
and  men,  but  is  incurable  in  all  alike;  therefore,  the  first  step,  when 
a  suspicious  case  presents  itself,  is  to  isolate  the  animal,  and  as  soon 
as  it  is  proved  that  glanders  exists,  the  animal  should  be  killed  at 
once  and  the  carcass  burned.  Everything  in  the  way  of  partitions, 
mangers,  feed  boxes,  buckets,  and  all  stable  utensils  must  be  burned, 
and  the  stalls  and  surroundings  thoroughly  disinfected.  Chloride 
of  lime,  S  ounces  in  1  gallon  of  water,  makes  a  good  and  efficient 
disinfectant.  With  this  solution  all  parts  of  the  stable  in  which  the 
affected  animal  stood  must  be  thoroughly  washed. 

TETANUS — LOCKJAW. 

(Plat.>  XVI.) 

Tetanus  is  an  infectious  disease,  the  specific  cause  of  which  is 
a  bacillus  or  germ  which,  in  most  localities,  is  found  in  abundance 
in  the  superficial  layer  of  the  earth  in  gardens,  around  buildings, 
stables,    etc. 

The  disease,  when  present,  always  follows  a  wound,  more  espe- 
cially one  produced  by  a  nail   puncture. 


PLATE  XVI. 


Tetanus. 


UVERSITX 


MISCELLANEOUS    DISEASES.  77 

The  germ  will  not  develop  in  the  presence  of  oxygen:  conse- 
quently, all  punctured  wounds  of  the  foot  should  be  freely  opened 
to  admit  of  the  introduction  of  air,  as  well  as  to  allow  of  thorough 
cleansing  with  an  antiseptic.  This  preventive  treatment  is  generally 
successful. 

In  warm  countries,  especially  in  tropical  climates,  cases  of  tetanus 
are  much  more  frequent  than  in  cold  regions. 

Symptoms. — Tetanic  spasms  (spasmodic  or  continuous  contrac- 
tions of  the  muscles)  appear,  as  a  rule,  in  the  muscles  of  the  neck 
and  head:  thence  they  extend  to  the  shoulders,  trunk,  and  extremi- 
ties; or  the  stillness  may  start  in  the  region  of  the  injured  organ  or 
member. 

Contraction  of  the  cheek  muscles;  the  inferior  maxillary  is  then 
no  longer  able  to  execute  the  slightest  movement,  and  the  prehension 
and  mastication  of  food  becomes  difficult  or  quite  impossible.  This 
inability  to  open  the  jaws  has  given  to  the  disease  the  name  of 
lockjaw. 

Contraction  of  the  great  posterior  muscles  of  the  eye  causes  a 
retraction  of  this  organ  within  the  orbit,  and  a  protrusion  of  the  haw 
upon  the  eyeball. 

The  animal*  is  very  stiff,  holds  his  head  in  an  extended  position 
as  if  suffering  from  a  sore  throat:  the  tail  is  elevated  and  the  ears 
drawn  closer  together:  the  nostrils  are  much  dilated;  the  legs  stand 
apart  :  the  eyes  indicate  excitement  and  anxiety,  the  mucous  mem- 
branes are  reddened;  some  muscular  groups,  principally  the  muscles 
of  the  cheeks  and  of  the  back  of  the  neck,  are  hard  and  distinctly 
outlined,  as  if  carved;  the  muscles  of  the  jaws,  neck  and  shoulders, 
back,  lumbar  region,  croup  and  tail  are  as  hard  as  wood. 

The  tail  and  ears  may  be  moved  by  the  hand,  but  they  imme- 
diately return  to  their  former  position. 

There  is  profuse  sweating  when  the  animal  is  disturbed  or  when 
he  is  in  a  spasm;  respiration  is  accelerated  and  laborious.  When  the 
patient  is  approached  for  an  examination,  his  excitement  increases 
instantly;  the  lower  jaw  is  pressed  hard  against  the  upper,  and  can 
not  be  separated  from  it.  even  by  the  most  violent  efforts  of  the 
examiner;  on  parting  the  lips  a  fetid  liquid  runs  out  of  the  mouth, 
which  is  more  or  less  tilled  with  particles  of  footl;  if  the  head  is  lifted 
the  whole  haw  obscures  the  greater  part  of  the  eyeball. 

Backing  is  extremely  difficult  or  even  impossible;  turning  is  also 
\rry  laborious;  the  trunk,  neck,  and  shoulders  can  not  be  Hexed, 
the  extremities  are  as  stiff  as  stilts. 

The  course  of  tetanus  is  variable,  according  to  the  individual. 
It  commonly  develops  rapidly,  and  death  takes  place  in  two  or 
three  days.  In  some  cases  death  occurs  more  slowly,  within  four  to 
eight   days  on   an   average.      In   others,    again,   where   the   spasm    is 


Ts  THE    AK.MV    HORSE    IN    ACCIDENT    AND    DISEASE. 

moderate  and  of  little  extent,  the  disease  may  continue  for  several 

weeks. 

Recovery  before  the  third  week  is  tare;  about  this  time  the  spasm 
begins  to  decline,  the  appetite  returns,  respiration  becomes  calmer, 
and  the  movements  more  Tree;  very  often  recovery  takes  place  only 

at  the  end  of  five  or  six  weeks;  there  may  be  a  continuance  of  the 
stiffness  of  movement  and  tension  of  the  muscles  of  the  back  for  a 
Long  period  of  time. 

Treatment. — A  systematic  course  of  food  and  the  freedom  of  the 
patient  from  all  kinds  of  excitement  are  the  two  essentials  in  the 
treatment. 

It  is  advisable  to  place  the  patient  in  a  dark  stall,  so  situated  as  to 
he  isolated  and  free  from  all  noises,  and  with  only  one  man  in  attend- 
ance: strangers  entering  the  stall  of  a  patient  affected  with  only  a 
mild  attack  may  cause  such  excitement  that  the  animal  is  thrown 
into  a  violent  spasm  and  dies  in  a  short  time. 

Give  the  patient  gruel,  mealy  drinks,  liquid  food,  and,  if  he  can 
eat  it,  green  fodder. 

Medicinal  agents  are  of  secondary  importance  in  the  treatment 
of  lockjaw.  Large  doses  (2  to  8  ounces)  of  bromide  of  potassium 
should  be  given  in  the  liquid  food,  twice  daily.  The  administration 
of  medicines  by  the  mouth  is  not  practicable;  not  only  because 
of  the  locked  jaws,  but  because  it  causes  excitement. 

The  infected  wound  requires  special  care.  It  should  be  well  opened 
up,  disinfected,  foreign  bodies  extracted,  etc. 

Some  authorities  recommend  the  use  of  the  suspending  sling. 

In  the  horse  the  mortality  from  this  disease  is  from  so  to  85  per 
cent. 

In  localities  where  tetanus  is  common,  a  preventive  serum, 
called  "antitetanic"  is  injected  into  the  blood,  whenever  the  horse 
receives  a  punctured  or  suspicious  wound. 

DISEASES    OF    THE    TEETH. 

On'account  of  the  character  of  its  food  the  horse  has  been  supplied 
with  molar  teeth,  with  roughened  grinding  surfaces.  The  lower 
jaw  is  narrower  than  the  upper  jaw,  and  the  table  (grinding)  surfaces 
are  sloping.  The  distance  from  the  gum  to  the  grinding  surface  is 
greater  on  the  outside  surface  of  the  upper  molars  and  the  reverse 
in  the  lower  molars. 

On  account  of  this  conformation  a  sharp  ridge  of  points  is  liable 
to  develop  on  the  outside  of  the  upper  molars  and  may  occur  on  the 
inside  of  the  lower  ones.  These  points  are  sometimes  so  sharp 
that  they  lacerate  the  cheeks  and  tongue  during  mastication.  A 
horse  thus  affected  will  frequently  bolt   his  food  before  thoroughly 


MISCELLANEOUS   DISEASES.  79 

masticating  it,  thereby  causing  chronic  indigestion.     He  will  also 
flinch  when  reined,  causing  great  annoyance  to  his  rider  or  driver. 

Such  irregularities  can  be  easily  detected  by  an  examination 
of  the  animal's  mouth  with  the  hand;  when  found,  the  sharp  edges 
must  be  removed  by  the  use  of  a  float . 

Decayed  teeth. 

All  teeth  are  apt  to  decay,  such  decay  being  generally  due  to 
an  injury. 

A  decayed  tooth  will  be  found  in  one  of  the  following  conditions: 
Split,  broken,  or  shorter  than  the  surrounding  ones,  and  having  a 
fetid  odor.  The  opposing  tooth  in  the  opposite  jaw  is  often  found 
to  be  elongated. 

Symptoms  of  irregularities  in  teeth. — Quidding  of  the  food,  holding 
the  head  to  one  side  while  masticating  food  or  drinking  water, 
slobbering,  chronic  catarrh,  fetid  breath,  swelling  of  the  maxilla 
in  the  neighborhood  of  the  teeth,  general  unthrifty  appearance,  etc. 

Treatment. — A  diseased  tooth  must  be  extracted,  and  an  elongated 
one  must  be  shortened  to  correspond  with  its  fellows. 

SPASM    OF   THE    DIAPHRAGM THUMPS. 

Caused  by  severe  exertion. 

Symptoms. — In  the  region  of  the  lower  part  of  the  left  flank,  near 
the  border  of  the  false  ribs,  will  be  observed  shocks  which,  at  times, 
shake  the  whole  body;  they  are  usually  accompanied  by  a  short, 
jerking  expiration,  and  by  a  dull,  thumping  sound  which  is  heard 
at  a  distance  of  several  paces.  The  trouble  may  be  followed  by 
inflammation  of  the  lungs  or  by  founder. 

Treatment. — Absolute  quiet  and  fresh  air  free  from  draughts. 

Give  the  following:  Aromatic  spirits  ammonia  2  ounces,  water  1 
pint.  Or,  sweet  spirits  of  niter  2  ounces,  fid.  ext.  belladonna  2 
drams,  water  to  make  1  pint.  Either  mixture  may  be  repeated  in 
one  hour  if  necessar}^. 

If  inflammation  of  the  lungs  or  founder  follows,  treat  accordingly. 
5417—09 6 


CHAPTER   IX. 


DISEASES  OF  THE  SKIN  AND  EYE. 

ERYTHEMA. 

Erythema  is  a  slightly  inflamed  condition  of  the  skin,  unattended 
by  any  eruption.  The  parts  are  slightly  swollen,  hot,  tender,  or 
itchy,  and  dry,  and  if  the  skin  is  white  there  is  redness. 

Erythema  may  arise  from  a  variety  of  causes,  as  chilling  or  partial 
freezing,  heat  and  burning,  chapping,  urine,  and  medicine. 

Treatment. — Apply  the  following  several  times  daily:  Sulphate  of 
zinc  1  ounce,  acetate  of  lead  1  ounce,  water  1  quart.  Or,  use  the 
following  ointment  twice  daily:  Oxide  of  zinc  1  ounce,  cosmoline  6 
ounces. 

GREASE. 
(Plate  XVII.) 

Grease  is  a  chronic  inflammation  of  the  skin  of  the  back  part  of 
the  fetlock  and  pastern.  It  is  usually  caused  by  lack  of  cleanliness, 
but  may  result  from  overfeeding  without  exercise. 

The  skin  is  at  first  red,  swollen,  painful,  and  hot.  It  is  soon  cov- 
ered by  vesicles  (blisters)  which  burst  and  discharge  a  thin,  yellowish 
liquid,  which  is  at  first  without  odor.  The  hairs  are  matted  together 
erect,  or  fall  out  in  large  quantities. 

Grease  produces,  in  the  course  of  time,  serious  alterations  in  the 
pastern  or  fetlock.  The  excreted  liquid  becomes  decomposed  and 
softens  the  epidermis.  A  kind  of  sticky,  doughy  exudate  is  formed, 
which  is  of  bad  aspect,  of  fetid  odor,  and  very  irritating. 

The  back  part  of  the1  pastern  and  fetlock  becomes  the  .seat  of 
granulating  wounds,  the  granulations  ranging  in  size  from  that  of  a 
pea  to  a  large  grape  (the  so-called  grapy  stage). 

Treatment. — In  the  first  stage  cleanliness  and  the  application  of 

the  ordinary  drying  powder  or  antiseptic  ointments  are  sufficient. 

In  cases  where  proud  flesh  exists,  the  granulations  must  be  removed 

with  the  knife  and  burned  with  red-hot  iron  or  lunar  caustic  and  then 

80 


PLATE  XVII. 


Grease. 


DISEASES    OF    THE    SKIN    AND    EYE.  81 

treated  as  a  fresh  wound.     Applications  of  iodine  and  glycerin  in 
equal  parts,  or  of  the  three  sulphates,  may  be  beneficial. 

SCRATCHES. 

Scratches  is  allied  to  grease  and  results  from  similar  causes;  it  is 
not  so  severe,  but  if  neglected  may  terminate  in  that  disease.  It  is 
usually  of  a  dry  nature,  with  shallow  cracks  in  the  skin,  and  often 
discharging  a  thin  liquid,  which  does  not  irritate  the  skin.  The  dis- 
ease is  located  in  the  back  part  of  the  pastern  joint.     • 

Treatment. — Cleanse  thoroughly  with  castile  soap  and  water,  dry, 
and  apply:  Sulphate  of  zinc  1  ounce,  acetate  of  lead  1  ounce,  water  1 
quart.  Or,  oxide  of  zinc  1  part,  lanolin  10  parts.  Or,  tincture  of 
iodine  may  be  resorted  to.  Good  results  are  obtained  by  a  dressing 
of  equal  parts  of  zinc  oxide  and  acetanilid,  kept  in  place  by  a  piece  of 
gauze  or  cotton  and  a  bandage. 

SCABIES  — MA  NG  E . 

This  is  a  contagious  skin  disease  produced  by  parasites  and  can  be 
transmitted  to  man. 

There  are  three  parasites  that  cause  mange;  two  varieties  burrow 
into  the  deepen-  layers  of  the  skin,  the  first  being  found  about  the 
head  and  neck  (though  it  may  spread  over  the  surface  of  the  body), 
the  second  at  the  roots  of  the  mane  and  tail;  the  third  species  does 
not  burrow  into  the  skin  and  is  found  on  the  extremities. 

Symptoms. — This  disease  is  characterized  by  great  itching  associ- 
ated with  the  formation  of  pustules  (pimples).  As  the  disease 
developes,  large  surfaces  become  destitute  of  hair  and  are  covered 
by  powdery  crusts  of  variable  thickness.  At  a  later  period  the  skin 
becomes  thickened,  wrinkled,  and  fissured,  assuming  the  appearance 
of  the  skin  of  the  rhinoceros. 

Treatment. — The  first  essential  is  the  separation  and  isolation  of 
the  unhealthy  from  the  well  animals.  Wash  the  affected  parts 
thoroughly  with  warm  water,  soap,  and  a  scrubbing  brush,  and 
apply  the  following:  Acetanilid  10  parts,  creolin  5  parts,  cosmoline 
20  parts.  Mell  the  cosmoline  and  mix  with  the  other  ingredients 
while  cooling.  This  ointment  should  be  applied  twice  a  day  and  the 
parts  thoroughly  washed  every  other  day.  Continue  the  treat- 
ment until  the  skin  becomes  healthy. 

SIMPLE    INJURIES    TO    THE    EYELIDS. 

Inflammation  of  the  mucous  membrane  lining  the  eyelids  may  be 
caused  by  bruises  or  the  presence  of  a  foreign  body,  such  as  sand, 
chall',  etc.      If  the  eyelids  should  become  torn,  they  must  be  sutured; 


82  THE   \i:mv  horse  in  accident  and  disease. 

the  utmost  care  is  necessary  as  the  needle  may  puncture  the  eyeball 
and  blindness  will  follow. 

Treatment. — Keep  the  parts  clean  with  a  saturated  solution  of 
boracic  acid,  and  dust  with  iodoform. 

SIMPLE    OPHTHALMIA       <  !<  >X.Jl  \(  II VITIS. 

Inllamniation  of  the  outer  parts  of  the  eyeball,  and  of  the  exposed 
vascular,   sensitive   mucous  membrane    (conjunctiva)   which    covers 

the  ball,  the  eyelids,  and  the  haw. 

The  causes  of  external  ophthalmia  are  mainly  those  which  act 
locally — blows  with  whips,  clubs,  and  twigs;  the  presence  of  foreign 
bodies,  such  as  chaff,  dust,  sand,  ammonia  arising  from  the  excre- 
ment, etc. 

Symptoms. — Watering  of  the  eye,  swollen  lids,  redness  of  the 
mucous  membrane  exposed  by  the  separation  of  the  lids,  and  a 
bluish  opacity  of  the  cornea,  which  normally  is  clear  and  transparent. 
The  eyelids  may  be  kept  closed,  the  eyeball  retracted,  and  the  haw 
protruded  over  one-third  or  one-half  of  the  ball.  If  the  affection 
has  resulted  from  a  wound  of  the  cornea,  a  white  speck  or  fleecy 
cloud  is  formed,  and  often  blood  vessels  begin  to  extend  from  the 
adjacent  vascular  covering  of  the  eye  to  the  white  spot,  and  that 
portion  of  the  cornea  is  rendered,  permanently  opaque. 

Treatment. — Place  the  horse  in  a  dark  stall  and  bathe  the  outside 
of  the  eye  with  tepid  water;  a  few  drops  of  the  following  lotion 
should  be  dropped  inside  the  eyelids:  Zinc  sulphate  20  grains,  boracic 
acid  1  dram,  fluid  extract  of  belladonna  1  dram,  water  4  ounces. 
Cover  the  eye  with  a  clean,  dark  cloth  on  the  inside  of  which  a  piece 
of  absorbent  cotton  has  been  sewed:  keep  the  cotton  saturated  with 
the  same  lotion.  This  treatment  should  be  applied  and  continued 
twice  daily  until  the  parts  assume  their  normal  condition.  In  case 
of  wound  or  ulcer  on  the  cornea,  make  use  of  a  quill,  through  which 
blow  iodoform  into  the  eye  daily. 

RECURRENT  OPHTHALMIA — MOONBLIXDXESS. 

This  affection,  sometimes  called  periodic  ophthalmia,  is  an  inflam- 
mation of  the  interior  of  the  eye:  it  is  intimately  related  to  certain 
soils  and  climates,  and  to  certain  animal  systems,  in  which  it  .-hows 
a  strong  tendency  to  recur  again  and  again,  usually  ending  in  blind- 
ness from  cataract  or  other  serious  injury.  Continuous  exposure  to 
bright  sunlight  is  frequently  an  exciting  cause. 

Symptoms  vary  according  to  the  severity  of  the  attack.  In 
some  cases  there  is  marked  fever.  The  local  symptoms  are  in  the 
main  those  of  simple  ophthalmia:  opacity  advances  from  the  margin 
over  a  part  or  the  whole  of  the  cornea.     An  attack  lastv  from  ten 


DISEASES   OF   THE    SKIN    AND    EYE.  83 

to  fifteen  days.  The  attacks  may  follow  each  other  at  intervals  of 
a  month,  more  or  less,  but  they  show  no  particular  relation  to  any 
particular  phase  of  the  moon.  From  five  to  seven  attacks  usually 
result  in  blindness,  and  then  the  other  eye  is  liable  to  be  attacked  until 
it  also  is  ruined. 

Treatment.  -Is  largely  the  same  as  that  for  simple  ophthalmia. 
During  recovery  a  course  of  tonics  is  often  very  beneficial  and  acts 
in  assisting  to  ward  off  another  attack.  Such  a  tonic  is  the  follow- 
ing: Sulphate  iron  1  ounce,  gentian  H-  ounces,  mix  vomica  H  ounces. 
Make  into  twelve  powders  and  give  one  powder,  in  feed,  twice  a  day. 

If  opacity  of  the  cornea  remains,  benefit  may  be  obtained  from 
the  use  of  silver  nitrate,  4  grains  to  1  ounce  of  water,  a  few  drops 
dropped  into  the  eye  twice  daily.  A  saturated  solution  of  iodide 
of  potassium  may  be  used  in  the  same  manner. 

CATARACT. 

Cataract  is  usually  the  result  of  repeated  attacks  of  recurrent 
ophthalmia.  It  is  an  opacity,  not  of  the  cornea,  but  of  the  crystaUim 
lens.     No  treatment  will  restore  it  to  its  normal  condition. 


CHAPTER  X. 


DISEASES  OF  THE  FEET. 

Removing  pressure  moans  trimming  the  bearing  surfaces  of  the  foot 
in  such  a  way  that  the  shoe  can  not  cause  pressure  upon  diseased 
structures. 

CORNS. 

A  corn  is  the  result  of  bruising  the  sensitive  sole  or  sensitive  laminae 
of  the  quarters  or  bars  and  appears  as  a  reddish  spot  in  the  angle 
formed  by  the  wall  and  bar,  usually  on  the  inside  of  the  front  feet, 
seldom,  if  ever,  in  the  hind  feet. 

Causes. — A  rapid  gait  on  hard  roads;  lowering  one  quarter  more 
than  the  other;  shoes  so  fitted  that  they  press  on  the  sole  at  the  heel, 
and  shoes  left  on  so  long  that  the  wall  overgrows  the  heels  of  the 
shoe  and  causes  the  shoe  to  press  on  the  sole;  long  feet,  which  remove 
the  frog  too  far  from  the  ground,  thus  preventing  the  proper  expan- 
sion of  the  foot. 

Treatment. — First  remove  the  cause  by  taking  off  the  shoe;  shorten 
the  toe,  lower  the  quarter  that  is  too  high,  or  correct  any  faults  that 
may  have  existed  in  the  preparation  of  the  foot.  Remove  all  pressure 
from  the  affected  spot  and  reshoe. 

In  case  of  severe  inflammation  and  probable  suppuration,  poultice 
or  soak  the  foot  until  the  horn  softens  and  pus  appears;  open  freely, 
disinfect,  remove  all  horn  that  is  underrun  by  pus  and  then  pack  with 
the  "three  sulphates"  until  suppuration  ceases.  Ping  the  corn  with 
oakum  or  tar  and  shoe  with  a  bar  shoe,  removing  all  pressure  from  the 
affected  quarter.  (The  special  function  of  the  bar  shoe  is  to  produce 
frog  pressure.)  The  three-quarter  shoe  may  also  be  used.  This  shoe 
will  prevent  pressure  on  the  diseased  spot,  but  it  has  a  tendency  to 
give  a  rocking  motion  to  the  foot  in  action. 

THRUSH. 

Thrush  is  a  diseased  condition  of  the  frog,  characterized  by  a  dark- 
colored  discharge  of  offensive  odor. 

Causes.     Qncleanliness;  horses  standing   in  stalls  saturated  with 
urine,  or  in  wet  earth  tilled  with  decomposing  vegetable  matter. 
84 


DISEASES   OF   THE    FEET.  85 

Symptoms.— -At  first  there  is  simply  an  increased  moisture  in  the 
cleft  of  the  frog,  accompanied  by  an  offensive  smell.  After  a  time  the 
discharge  is  more  profuse,  then  watery  and  highly  offensive,  changing 

gradually  to  a  thick,  putrid  matter,  which  rapidly  destroys  the  horn 
of  the  frog. 

Treatment. — Remove  the  cause;  keep  stalls  clean  and  dry.  Pare 
away  all  lose  poll  ions  of  the  horn,  so  as  to  expose  the  diseased  parts: 
clean  thoroughly  by  washing  with  warm  water;  dry  with  oakum  and 
pack  with  powdered  alum,  calomel,  or  copper  sulphate;  if  the  dress- 
ing will  not  remain  in  place  use  a  leather  hoot. 

CANKER. 

Canker  is  a  disease  of  the  frog  and  sole,  marked  by  an  offensive- 
smelling,  cheesy  discharge,  by  a  softening  and  breaking  down  of  the 
horny  frog  and  sole,  and  a  spongy  enlargement  of  the  sensitive  frog 
and  sole.  When  this  disease  follows  an  injury  which  has  exposed 
the  soft  structures  of  the  foot,  it  soon  causes  a  separation  of  the  soft 
and  horny  portions,  presenting  a  very  unhealthy  appearance  and  dis- 
charging a  thin,  watery  fluid. 

Causes. — Canker  is  generally  believed  to  be  caused  by  a  vegetable 
parasite,  the  development  of  which  is  assisted  by  filthy  stables  or  low, 
wet  ground. 

Treatment. — That  part  of  the  frog  or  sole  that  has  been  underrun 
must  be  removed  with  the  knife  and  the  canker  exposed:  the  un- 
healthy growth  is  then  touched  with  a  red-hot  iron,  burning  it  off 
level  with  the  surrounding  healthy  structures,  care  being  exercised 
not  to  injure  the  sensitive  portions  of  the  foot.  Xext,  wash  clean, 
then  dry  and  apply  the  following  powder:  Equal  parts  of  sulphate  of 
zinc,  sulphate  of  iron,  and  sulphate  of  copper.  Place  over  this  a  pad 
of  oakum,  and  over  all  a  leather  boot.  This  dressing  must  be  changed 
once  a  day  (twice  a  day  in  bad  cases);  treatment  is  continued  until 
a  healthy  growth  of  horn  covers  the  whole  foot.  The  horse  can  now 
be  shod.  Pack  the  foot  with  oakum  and  tar  and  cover  with  a  leather 
sole,  which  is  held  in  place  by  the  shoe. 

If  it  is  desirable  to  change  dressings  on  the  shod  foot,  a  more  con- 
venient appliance  to  keep  them  in  place  is  made  in  the  following  man- 
ner: Cut  a  piece  of  sheet  zinc  to  cover  about  two-thirds  of  the  sole 
and  frog,  the  outer  edge  of  the  piece  fitting  under  the  shoe:  cut 
another  piece  to  cover  the  remaining  third  and  wide  enough  to  lap 
over  the  lirst  piece,  the  lap  to  run  parallel  to  the  cleft  of  the  frog; 
then  cut  a  -trip  about  1  inch  wide  to  act  as  a  keeper:  the  ends  of  this 
strip  are  prosed  under  the  shoe,  the  strip  passing  across  the  foot  from 
quarter  to  quarter. 


86  THE  ARMY    HOBSE    IX    ACCIDENT    AND    DISEASE. 

QUITTOR. 

A  quittor  is  a  running  sore,  situated  on  the  coronet  of  the  foot, 
with  one  or  more  tubes  (sinuses)  leading  In  a  downward  direction 
and  discharging  pus. 

Causes. — Pricks  in  shoeing;  punctures  of  the  coronet,  sole  or  frog; 
bruises  or  suppurating  corns. 

Symptoms.  A  swelling  on  the  coronet,  presenting  a  peculiarly 
unhealthy  appearance,  and  in  the  center  of  which  are  one  or  more 
sinuses  communicating  with  the  diseased  structures  inside  of  the 
foot.     In  nearly  all  cases  the  horse  is  very  lame. 

Truil mint.  Find  out,  if  possible,  what  has  caused  the  quittor. 
If  it  is  the  result  of  a  nail  prick  or  a  festered  corn,  open  it  up  on 
the  underside  of  the  foot,  allow  the  pus  to  run  out,  and  then  treat 
as  described  under  "Puncture."  If  no  nail  prick  or  corn  can  be 
found,  treat  the  quittor  from  above,  by  injecting  into  the  sinuses 
one  of  the  following  solutions:  Carbolic  acid,  1  to  20:  creolin,  1 
to  25;  bichloride  of  mercury,  1  to  500.  This  treatment  should  be 
continued  for  several  days,  at  the  end  of  winch  period,  if  the  parts 
do  not  appear  in  a  healthier  condition,  inject  into  the  tubes  1  dram 
of  bichloride  of  mercury  well  shaken  up  in  1  ounce  of  water.  This 
will  cau>e  a  separation  of  the  diseased  walls  of  the  tube  from  the 
healthy  parts  of  the  foot.  Poultices  of  flaxseed  meal  assist  this 
separation.  Keep  the  parts  clean  and  wash  out  with  carbolic  acid  or 
creolin  as  at  first.  If  the  sore  does  not  heal  under  this  treatment 
a  surgical  operation  will  be  necessary. 

QUARTER    CRACKS    AND    TOE    CRACKS. 

A  toe  or  quarter  crack  (often  called  a  sand  crack)  is  a  split  in  the 
horn  of  the  wall;  the  position  of  the  crack  determines  the  name 
applied  to  it.  Horses  with  thin,  weak  quarters  are  predisposed  to 
quarter  crack. 

Causes. — Excessive  dryness  of  the  hoof;  alternate  changing  from 
damp  to  dry:  heavy  shoes;  large  nails,  and  nails  set  too  far  back 
toward  the  heels. 

Symptoms.  -The  crack  generally  starts  at  the  coronary  band  and 
gradually  extends  downward  to  the  lower  border  of  the  wall.  The 
mosi  common  form  of  quarter  crack  is  a  deep  lissure  extending 
through,  the  wall  and  causing  a  pinching  of  the  sensitive  structures. 
When,  however,  the  crack  is  not  deep  there  is  seldom  any  lameness. 

Treatment.  The  first  step  is  to  remove  the  shoe  and  soften  the 
horn  by  poultices  or  by  standing  in  warm  or  cold  water  for  a  few 
days,  then  cut  away  the  hard  overlapping  edges  of  the  fissure  and 
thin  the  wall  on  each  side  so  that  there  will  be  no  friction  between 
the  edges  of  the  crack.       As  the  wall  grows  down  from  the  coronet 


DISEASES   OF   THE    FEET.  87 

the  upper  end  of  the  crack  must  be  carefully  observed  to  see  that 
the  new  horn  grows  down  strong  and  smooth.  In  time  the  crack 
will  disappear  at  the  lower  edge  of  the  wall.  If  the  sensitive  lamina' 
have  been  exposed  by  this  operation,  the  parts  should  be  washed 
with  a.  solution  of  creolin,  1  to  50,  and  the  wound  should  be  dusted 
with  acetanilid  and  covered  with  a  pad  of  oakum  held  in  place  by 
a  boot  or  bandage.  In  a  few  days  a  thin  layer  of  horn  will  be  thrown 
out.  covering  the  sensitive  laminae.  The  horse  can  then  generally 
be  put  to  work. 

After  a  quarter  crack  has  been  trimmed  out,  the  horse  should  be 
shod  with  a  bar  shoe,  the  wall  underneath  the  quarter  crack  being 
cut  away  so  that  it  will  not  come  in  contact  with  the  shoe. 

In  a  case  of  toe  crack  the  operation  is  the  same.  In  shoeing,  the 
wall  is  cut  away  at  the  toe  to  prevent  pressure. 

PUNCTURE    <)F   THE    SOLE    AND    FROG — PRICKS    IX    SHOEING. 

A  puncture  of  the  sole  or  frog  is  usually  caused  by  a  horse  stepping 
on  a  nail,  a  piece  of  broken  glass,  or  other  sharp  object.  If  the  wound 
enters  the  soft  structures  of  the  foot,  it  results  in  lameness  and  the 
formation  of  pus. 

Pricks  in  shoeing  are  of  two  kinds:  First,  when  the  nail  is  driven 
into  the  soft  structures,  and,  second,  when  it  is  driven  too  close, 
causing  a  bulging  of  the  inner  layer  of  horn,  which  is  forced  in  upon 
the  sensitive  laminae.  In  the  first  case  the  horse  goes  lame  imme- 
diately: in  the  second  case  lameness  may  not  appear  for  several  days 
or  weeks. 

To  detect  a  punctured  wound  of  the  foot  remove  the  shoe,  exam- 
ining each  nail  as  it  is  withdrawn  for  traces  of  moisture.  Then 
tot  with  the  pinchers.  When  the  sore  spot  is  pressed,  the  horse 
will  flinch. 

Treatment.  —Open  the  wound  and  let  out  any  pus  that  may  have 
formed;  wash  out  with  a  solution  of  creolin,  1  to  25,  or  of  carbolic- 
acid,  1  to  20.  Unless  the  pus  has  a  good  outlet,  it  will  burrow  into 
the  surrounding  tissues  and  quittor  or  canker  may  follow.  More- 
over, there  is  always  danger  of  tetanus  in  all  cases  of  punctured 
wounds,  especially  in  the  feet.  The  germ  of  this  disease  is  present 
in  nearly  all  soils  and  is  very  liable  to  be  carried  into  the  wound 
upon  the  nail  or  other  object.  After  the  wound  has  been  opened 
uj)  and  washed  out,  the  foot  should  be  placed  in  a  hot  flaxseed  poul- 
tice, a  fresh  one  being  applied  three  or  four  times  a  day,  and  the 
parts  washed  out  after  each  poultice,  as  in  the  first  instance.  The 
treatment  should  be  continued  until  inflammation  is  reduced  and 
the  formation  of  pus  has  ceased.  The  hole  can  then  be  plugged 
with  oakum  and  tar.  the  shoe  reset,  and  the  horse  put  to  work. 


88  III  I .    ARM?    EORSE    IN    ACCIDENT   AND    DISEASE. 

LAMINITIS   OR    POUNDER. 

Laminitis  is  an  inflammatioD  of  the  sensitive  Laminae  (generally  of 
the  front  feet)  and  may  involve  the  adjoining  structures.  There  ara 
three  forms  of  the  disease     acute,  subacute,  and  chronic. 

The  exudation  of  blood  is  greatesl  at  the  toe,  the  foot  being  more 
vascular  at  that  point.  The  pain  of  acute  laminitis  is  very  persistent 
and  agonizing,  because  the  swollen  and  sensitive  portions  of  the 
foot  are  surrounded  by  the  hard  and  unyielding  hoof  and  the  en- 
gorged blood  vessels  are  not  permitted  free  exudation  and  swelling, 
the  normal  means  by  which  congested  blood  vessels  are  relieved. 

Causes. — The  most  common  are  concussion,  overexertion,  ex- 
haustion, rapid  changes  of  temperature,  the  eating  of  various  improper 
foods,  such  as  musty  grain,  hay,  etc.,  and  the  drinking  of  cold  water 
when  the  animal  is  overheated. 

Symptoms. — In  acute  laminitis  of  both  front  feet  the  animal  is 
excessively  lame,  moves  with  great  difficulty, especially  when  starting, 
and  appears  as  if  the  entire  body  were  in  a  state  of  cramp ;  he  stands 
with  the  hind  legs  drawn  under  the  belly  and  the  fore  feet  advanced, 
in  order  to  relieve  them  of  as  much  weight  as  possible.  Occasionally 
he  may  be  seen  to  sway  backward,  elevating  the  toes  and  throwing 
the  weight  for  a  moment  upon  the  heels  of  the  front  feet,  and  then 
resuming  the  original  position.  If  compelled  to  move,  he  raises 
the  feet  laboriously,  not  because  the  muscles  of  locomotion  are 
inflamed,  as  is  sometimes  supposed,  but  because,  if  all  four  feet  arc 
not  on  the  ground  at  the  same  time  to  bear  the  weight  of  the  body, 
his  suffering  is  increased.  He  will  often  groan  with  pain  and  sweat 
will  break  out  over  the  body.  To  diagnose  a  case  quickly,  the  besl 
method  is  to  push  the  horse  backward,  when,  if  affected,  he  will 
elevate  the  toes  and  throw  his  weight  upon  the  heels. 

The  pulse  in  acute  laminitis  is  full,  strong,  and  rapid  and  will 
maintain  these  characteristics  even  after  general  debility  has  become 
manifest.  In  some  instance's  the  animal  will  lie  down  upon  his  side, 
with  the  legs  stretched  out.  for  hours  at  a  time,  evidently  feeling 
great  relief  in  this  position;  in  other  cases,  particularly  during  the 
early  period  of  the  disease,  he  will  stand  persistently.  The  tem- 
perature ranges  from  102°  to  104°. 

Treatment.  Remove  the  shoes  from  the  affected  feet:  stand  the 
horse  in  hot  water  for  several  hours  each  day,  or,  what  is  equally 
good  and  perhaps  safer,  apply  hot  flaxseed  poultices,  changing 
them  every  hour  as  they  become  cold.  After  two  or  three  days 
of  this  treatment  change  to  cold  water, which  can  be  applied  either 
in  the  form  of  a  footbath  or  by  standing  the  animal  in  a  running 
stream  for  live  or  six  hours  at  a  time.  As  soon  as  the  pain  has 
diminished,  moderate  exercise  is  beneficial;  this  may  be  gradually 


DISEASES   OF   THE   FEET.  89 

increased  until  the  animal  shows  no  further  sigD  of  trouble.  If,  after 
five  or  six  days,  pronounced  symptoms  of  recovery  are  not  apparent, 
apply  a  stiff  blister  of  cantharides  around  the  coronet,  repeating  the 
blister  if  necessary.  In  addition  to  the  local  treatment,  nitrate  of 
potash  (saltpeter),  in  doses  of  2  to  4  ounces,  may  be  given  three 
times  a  day.  If  the  horse  is  constipated,  give  1  quart  of  raw  lin- 
seed oil.  The  subacute  and  chronic  forms  may  be  relieved  by  soften- 
ing the  foot  as  in  "Dry  feet,"  by  occasional  blistering  and  by  intelli- 
gent  shoeing. 

SEEDY    TOE. 

Seedy  toe  is  a  mealy  condition  of  the  inner  wall  of  the  hoof,  the 
white  line,  and  sometimes  the  sole.  It  is  most  frequently  seen  in 
the  front  feet. 

Causes. — Undue  pressure,  clips  on  shoes,  or  the  result  of  laminitis. 

Treatment. — Pare  the  wall  of  the  cavity  until  healthy  horn  is 
reached  and  pack  with  tar  and  oakum.  Stimulate  healthy  growth 
of  horn  by  the  application  of  a  cantharides  blister  at  the  coronet. 
Omit  the  clip  in  reshoeing. 

CONTRACTED   FEET. 

Contracted  feet  is  an  unnatural  shrinking  or  narrowing  of  the  feet 
at  the  heels.     Most  often  seen  in  the  front  feet. 

Causes. — Lack  of  exercise;  lack  of  moisture:  thrush;  shoes  with 
bearing  web  inclining  inward  at  the  heels.  The  practice  of  using  the 
knife  to  "open  the  heels"  usually  produces  this  trouble. 

Treatment. — Ascertain  the  cause  and  remove  it  if  possible.  The 
remedy  is  to  secure  normal  pressure  on  the  frog,  bars,  and  heels.  If 
the  feet  are  extremely  dry  and  hard  they  may  be  softened  by  standing 
the  animal  in  moist  clay  or  in  water.  If  the  character  of  the  ground 
will  permit  let  the  horse  <:<>  barefoot :  if  not,  shoe  with  the  tip,  prefer- 
ably; otherwise,  with  the  bar  shoe. 

DRY    FEET. 

Soften  the  hoofs  by  thorough  soaking  in  water  and  then   apply 

cosmoline  or  linseed  oil  to  prevent  the  water  from  evaporating.    This 

should  be  done  daily  for  a  week  or  two.     A  thick  paste  of  ground  flax- 

1   and  water,  packed  into  the  cavity  of  the  foot   between   the 

branches  of  the  shoe,  or  a  packing  of  moist  clay,  will  keep  the  foot  soft. 

COFFIN-JOINT    LAMENESS 

Sprain  of  the  coffin  joint  results  from  slipping,  stepping  upon  a 
rolling  stone,  stepping  into  a  hole.  etc. 

Symptoms. — Shortened  gait;  lameness  and  pointing  of  diseased 
foot ;  heat  over  the  region  of  the  coffin  joint;  tenderness  on  pressure. 


90  THE   Al;.\lY    HORSE    IN    ACCIDENT   AND   DISEASE. 

Treatment.  —Remove  the  shoe  and  give  the  animal  complete  rest; 
poultice  t  Ire  fool  \\  it  1 1  flaxseed  meal  or  stand  the  foot  in  a  tub  of  cold 
water;  if  relief  is  m>t  obtained  in  a  week,  apply  a  blister  of  biniodide 
of  mercury.  1  to  5,  around  the  coronet  and  heels,  rubbing  it  in  well 
over  the  region  of  the  heels. 

Sprain  of  the  collm  joint,  unless  carefully  nursed,  may  terminate 
in  chronic  navicular diseast ,  in  which  the  coffin-joint  structures  and  the 
coffin  bone  itself  become  ulcerated.     This  disease  is  incurable. 

If,  after  navicular  disease  has  developed,  it  be  necessary  to  keep 
the  horse  ill  the  service,  the  heel  of  the  diseased  foot  should  be  elevated 

by  the  use  of  a  shoe  with  calks  or  with  thick  heels.  The  foot  should 
be  kept  soft  with  footbaths  and  poultices  and  a  blister  applied  when 
lameness  is  especially  marked.  Whenever  possible  keep  the  shoe  off 
during  treatment. 


PLATE  XVIII. 


Fig.  1,  Sidebone.    Fig.  2,  Ringbone.    Fig.  3,  Bone  spavin.    Fig.  4,  Splint. 


CHAPTER  XL 


DISEASES   OF  BONE   AND   DETECTION   OF   LAMENESS. 

SIDEBONES. 

(Plate  XVIII,  fig.  1.) 

Sidebone  is  an  ossification  (turning  into  bone)  of  the  lateral  carti- 
lage. Horses  with  flat  feet  and  weak  quarters  arc  predisposed  to 
this  disease. 

Symptoms. — A  hard,  unyielding  condition  of  the  lateral  cartilage, 
with  or  without  lameness. 

Treatment. — If  the  horse  is  lame  the  first  step  is  to  remove  the  shoe 
and  level  the  foot;  then  let  the  horse  stand  in  a  tub  of  cold  water 
for  several  hours  a  day.  <>r  apply,  around  the  coronet,  swabs  kept  wet 
with  cold  water.  As  soon  as  the  fever  has  disappeared  clip  off  the 
hair  over  the  sidebones  and  blister  with  this  ointment:  Biniodide  of 
mercury  1  part,  cosmoline  5  parts;  mix  thoroughly  and  rub  in  for  ten 
minutes.  Tie  up  the  horse's  head  so  that  he  can  not  reach  the  blis- 
tered part  with  his  lips,  and  keep  him  in  this  position  for  twenty-four 
to  forty-eight  hours.  Then  wash  off  the  blister,  using  warm  water  and 
castile  soap.  The  washing  must  be  repeated  every  day  until  all  the 
scabs  formed  by  the  blister  have  been  removed.  During  this  time  keep 
the  horse  standing  quietly  in  a  clean  and  level  stall.  If  after  ten 
days  he  has  not  improved,  firing,  followed  by  a  long  period  of  rest, 
may  prove  beneficial. 

RINGBONE. 

(Plate  WITT.  fig.  2.) 

Ringbone  is  a  bony  enlargement,  more  or  less  prominent,  situated 
upon  either  the  os  suffraginis  or  os  coronte,  and  it  may  also  involve 
the  articular  cartilages. 

Causes. — Blows,  sprains,  jumping,  last  work  on  hard  roads,  and 
faulty  conformation. 

Symptoms. — Lameness  is  usually  the  first  symptom,  and  diagnosis 
is  assisted  by  palpation  (feeling)  and  comparison  of  the  two  legs. 
The  enlargement  is  hard,  painless  on  pressure,  and  the  skin  covering 
is  movable. 

Treatment. — The  foot  must  be  pared  perfectly  level  and  a  blister 
applied  to  the  enlargement  and  repeated  in  two  weeks  if  necessary. 

91 


Till:    ARMY    HORSE    IN    ACCEDENl     AND    DISEASE. 

Perfect   rest  and  quietude  for  four  to  six  weeks  are  essential,  or  no 
beneficial  results  can  be  expected. 

[f  tin1  res!  and  blisters  fail  to  remove  the  Lameness  firing  may 
sometimes  be  resorted  to.  Puncture  firing  in  two  or  three  rows  is 
often  very  effective.  After  firing  the  seat  of  the  injury  should  be 
blistered  with  biniodide  of  mercury,  1  to  5,  and  the  animal  kept 
quiet  in  a  single  stall  for  at  least  one  month. 

BONE    SPAVIN. 

(Plate  XVIII.  fig.  3.) 

Bone  spavin  is  a  disease  involving  the  hones  in  the  hock  joint  and 
is  usually  manifested  in  a  bony  enlargement,  situated  at  the  inner 
and  lower  part  of  the  tarsus. 

Causes. — "Weakness,  faulty  conformation,  severe  -trains,  hard  and 
rapid  work.  etc. 

Symptoms. — The  appearance  of  this  disease  is  usually  accompanied 
by  lameness,  which  in  the  early  stages  of  the  disease  is  noticed  only 
when  the  animal  is  first  moved  after  a  rest,  and  then  the  toe  is  gen- 
erally placed  upon  the  ground  first.  When  standing,  the  animal 
often  rests  the  diseased  leg  on  the  toe. 

The  "spavin  test"  is  sometimes  useful  in  diagnosing  spavin  lame- 
ness. It  consists  in  keeping  the  hock  joint  flexed  for  one  or  two 
minutes  and  then  trotting  the  horse.  If  a  spavin  exists  lameness  i- 
very  marked. 

Treatment. — The  treatment  of  bone  spavin  is  the  same  as  that 
prescribed  for  ringbone. 

SPLINTS. 
(Plate  XVIII.fig 

Splints  are  bony  enlargements,  usually  situated  between  the  inner 
splint  bone  and  the  cannon  bone,  at  their  upper  third.  They  occa- 
sionally occur  on  the  outside  of  the  hind  leg. 

Causes. — Faulty  action  or  faulty  conformation  causing  unequal 
distribution  of  pressure  in  the  knee  may  throw  an  excessive  load  on 
the  inner  small  metacarpal  and  cause  rupture  of  the  tissue  affixing 
the  -mall  to  the  large  metacarpal.  The  irritation  produces  growth 
of  bone. 

Symptoms. — Soreness  may  or  may  not  be  present :  when  the  splint 
i-  painful  the  horse  is  lame. 

Treatment. — If  there  i-  lameness  give  the  animal  absolute  rest  and 
apply  a  blister  composed  as  follows:  Biniodide  of  mercury  1  dram. 
cosmoline  5  drains.      Repeat  in  ten  days  if  necessary. 

DETECTION    OF    I  AMENESS 

Severe  lameness  is  readily  recognized,  even  when  the  animal  i-  at 
rest.     Distinct  symptoms,  such  a-  pointing  <>r  frequent  raising  of  the 


DISEASES   OF   BONE   AND   DETECTION    OF   LAMENESS.  93 

affected  limb,  are  noticed,  the  animal's  instinct  leading  him  to  place 
the  affected  part  in  a  position  to  relieve  the  pain. 

In  making  an  examination  for  lameness,  the  animal,  having  free 
use  of  his  head,  should  be  led  at  a  slow  trot  toward  and  from  the 
observer.  Too  short  a  hold  on  the  halter  shank  will  prevent  free 
play  of  all  the  muscles  concerned  in  locomotion. 

If  lame  in  one  fore  leg,  the  right  one  for  instance,  the  head  will 
nod  (drop)  more  or  less  when  he  steps  on  the  left  fore  leg,  while  the 
head  jerks  up  at  the  moment  the  right  leg  (the  lame  one)  is  placed 
upon  the  ground.  Hence,  the  head  of  the  lame  animal  always  nods 
when  the  sound  leg  is  planted. 

Should  there  be  lameness  in  both  fore  Ivv;*  the  action  is  stilty  (stiff) ; 
the  natural,  elastic  stride  is  wanting;  the  steps  are  shortened,  and 
the  feet  kept  close  to  the  ground.  Almost  invariably  the  hind  legs 
are  picked  up  higher  than  normally;  the  shoulders  appear  stiff  and 
the  head  is  carried  rather  high,  while  the  lumbar  region  is  arched. 

Lameness  behind  is  detected  by  trotting  the  horse  from  the  ob- 
server, the  croup  being  the  essential  part  to  be  watched,  since  it 
drops  with  the  sound  leg  and  rises  with  the  lame  one. 

If  lame  in  both  hind  legs,  the  stride  is  shortened  and  awkward ; 
the  fore  legs  are  kept  back  of  the  vertical  line,  and  are  apt  to  be 
raised  higher  than  usual,  while  the  head  is  lowered.  Backing  is  diffi- 
cult; it  is  almost  impossible  to  keep  the  animal  at  a  trot  when  he 
is  lame  in  more  than  one  leg. 

Horses  lame  in  both  fore  or  both  liind  legs  show  a  waddling  gait 
behind,  often  mistaken  for  lameness  originating  in  the  lumbar  region. 
This  peculiar  motion  is  simply  due  to  the  fact  that  the  hind  legs  are 
unduly  advanced  under  the  body  for  their  own  relief  or  that  of  the 
front  legs.  Close  attention  is  to  be  paid  to  the  animal's  action  as 
he  turns  while  being  trotted  to  and  from  the  observer,  as  at  this 
moment — that  is,  while  he  turns — any  hitch  becomes  visible;  as,  for 
instance,  spavin  or  stringhalt  lameness. 

Always  place  the  lame  leg  in  its  natural  position  and  inspect  the 
various  parts  of  the  leg  hot  1 1  with  the  hand  and  eve,  comparing  them 
always  with  the  sound  leg  to  find  anatomical  changes. 

In  all  cases  examine  the  foot  thoroughly  and  carefully,  removing 
the  shoe  if  necessary.  Heat,  pain,  and  swelling  are  always  guides 
in  the  diagnosis  of  lameness. 

All  lameness  is  divided  into  two  classes:  Swinging-leg  lameness, 
which  is  shown  by  a  shortened  stride  and  more  or  less  dragging  of 
the  leg;  and  supporting-leg  lameness,  winch  shows  itself  when  the 
leg  supports  the  weight  of  the  body.  The  former  is  shown  in  dis- 
eased condition  of  the  muscles.  The  latter  is  shown  in  disease  of 
bone,  tendons,  ligaments,  and  the  hoof. 


CHAPTER  XII. 


AGE  BY   THE  TEETH. 

By  their  growth,  changes,  form,  and  wear,  the  teeth  <>f  the  horse 
furnish  a  very  reliable  guide  to  determine  the  animal's  age.  In  the 
adult  animal  they  number  from  36  in  the  female  to  40  in  the  male. 
and  are  classed  according  to  their  location,  form,  and  function,  as 
incisors,  canines,  and  molars. 

The  incisors,  or  cutters,  occupy  the  front  part  of  the  month.  They 
are  12  in  number,  6  in  the  upper  jaw  and  6  in  the  lower.  In  each 
jaw  there  are  2  central,  2  lateral,  and  2  corner  incisors. 

The  canines,  or  tushes,  occupy  the  front  part  of  the  interdental 
space.  The  tushes  are  usually  absent  in  the  mare,  or,  if  present, 
are  very  small.     They  are  4  in  number,  2  in  each  jaw. 

The  molars,  or  grinders,  occupy  the  back  part  of  the  mouth.  They 
are  24  in  number,  6  on  each  side  of  each  jaw.  Naming  from  front  to 
rear  they  are  designated  first,  second,  third,  etc.  Quite  frequently 
supplementary  molars,  called  "wolf  teeth,"  are  present.  If  so,  they 
appear  directly  in  front  of  the  first  molar,  in  the  upper  jaw,  and  very 
rarely  in  the  lower  jaw. 

lake  other  animals,  the  horse  is  provided  with  two  sets  of  teeth, 
temporary  and  permanent.  The  temporary,  or  milk  teeth,  are  those 
of  the  first  growth  or  dentition.  They  are  24  in  number,  12  incisors 
and  the  first,  second,  and  third  molars.  The}'  are  all  up  and  in  wear 
when  the  colt  is  about  11  months  old.  Each  of  them  is  ultimately 
shed  and  replaced  by  a  permanent  tooth.  The  first  shedding  take- 
place  at  2+  and  the  last  is  completed  at  4^  years  of  age.  The  first 
permanent  tooth  to  show  itself,  however,  is  the  fourth  molar,  which 
appears  at  about  the  age  of  1  year. 

The  permanent  incisor  differs  in  appearance  from  the  temporary 
one  by  being  larger,  longer,  darker,  or  more  yellowish  in  color,  and 
by  having  a  well-marked  groove  down  the  anterior  or  from  face  of 
the  crown.  It  does  not  have  the  constricted  neck  which  is  charac- 
teristic of  the  milk  tooth. 

The  three  principal  tooth  substances  are  called  dentine,  enamel, 

and  cement.     The  dentine  composes  the  main  body  of  the  tooth.     It 

is  protected  by  a  covering  of  enamel,  which  is  very  white  in  color  and 

is  the  hardest  of  all  animal  snbst ances.     The  cement   is  a  yellowish 

94 


AGE   BY   THE   TEETH.  95 

colored  bony  material.  It  also  forms  a  protective  covering  for  the 
tooth,  being  spread  in  a  thin  layer  over  the  surface  of  the  enamel. 
This  cement  gives  the  permanent  tooth  the  color  which  distinguishes 
it  from  the  milk  tooth.  By  the  time  the  animal  is  7  or  8  years  of 
age,  this  substance,  through  constant  rubbing  by  the  lips  and  washing 
with  saliva,  has  been  worn  from  the  enamel,  and  the  teeth  conse- 
quently appear  much  white!'  than  they  did  when  the  animal  was 
but  5  or  6. 

The  grinding  surface  of  the  tooth  is  called  the  table.  In  the  new 
unworn  tooth  this  is  irregular  and  is  covered  with  enamel.  The  irvfun- 
dibulum  is  the  infolding  of  the  enamel  on  the  table  of  the  tooth. 
This  forms  in  the  incisors  a  cavity,  the  bottom  of  which  is  lilled  with 
cement  to  a  depth  which  varies  in  different  animals.  The  unfilled 
portion  of  this  cavity  forms  what  is  called  the  cup.  The  cups  are 
deeper  in  the  upper  incisors  than  they  are  in  the  lower  ones.  They 
soon  become  stained  by  the  food  juices  so  that  they  appear  very 
black  in  color.  Ordinarily  after  a  lower  incisor  has  been  in  wear 
for  three  years  its  table  surface  has  been  wTorn  down  to  the  cement 
filling  and  the  blackened  cup  cavity  has  disappeared.  It  is  often 
difficult  for  the  inexperienced  observer  to  determine  when  the  cup 
has  actually  disappeared.  He  expects  to  see  the  table  surface  per- 
fectly level  and  of  uniform  color,  whereas  the  enamel  being  so  much 
harder  than  either  the  dentine  or  the  cement,  stands  in  relief  on  the 
table  surface,  and  envelops  a  very  shallow  and  sometimes  slightly 
stained  depression  (of  cement)  for  several  years  after  the  black  cup 
cavity  is  considered  to  have  disappeared.  The  enamel  of  the  infun- 
dibulum  persists  in  the  lowers  usually  until  the  animal  is  about  15 
and  in  the  uppers  until  he  is  about  18  years  of  age.  Standing  in 
relief  on  the  table  surface  as  it  does,  this  enamel  is  frequently  termed 
"the  enamel  island." 

In  the  center  of  the  tooth,  and  extending  almost  its  entire  length, 
is  the  pulp  cavity,  a  channel,  which  in  life  is  filled  with  a  fleshy  tissue 
or  pulp  through  the  medium  of  which  the  tooth  derives  its  nourish- 
ment. As  the  tooth  is  worn  off  with  age  the  outer  extremity  of  the 
sensitive  pulp,  which  would  otherwise  become  exposed,  is  changed 
into  a  yellowish  colored  ivory-like  substance  that  completely  fills 
and  closes  the  cavity.  Hence,  when  the  tooth  has  worn  down  to 
the  pulp  cavity,  the  latter  appears  on  the  table  surface  (just  in 
front  of  the  remains  of  the  cup)  as  a  yellowish  colored  mark  called 
the  dental  star.  This  usually  makes  its  appearance  when  the  animal 
is  8  years  old,  although  in  very  hard  teeth  it  is  often  not  apparent 
until  about  11. 

Depending  upon  the  hardness  of  the  dentine  and  the  character  of 
the  food,  the  teeth  wear  away  at  the  rate  of  about  one-twelfth  of  an 
inch  per  year.  As  an  incisor  is  not  of  uniform  shape  or  size  from  its 
5417—09 7 


96  THE   ARMY    HORSE   IN   ACCIDENT   AND   DISEASE. 

crown  to  its  root,  it  is  at  once  apparent  thai  wear  will  continually 
change  the  form  of  its  table  surface. 

In  the  young  mouth  the  tables  of  the  incisors  arc  elongated  from 
side  to  side,  while  in  the  old  mouth  they  are  elongated  from  front  to 
rear.  The  intermediate  forms  through  which  they  successively  pass 
are  oval,  round,  and  triangular.  Roughly  speaking,  the  incisors  are 
oval  from  7  till  9  (centrals  at  7,  laterals  at  8,  and  corners  at  9),  round 
from  10  till  13,  triangular  from  14  till  17,  and  elongated  from  front 
to  rear  at  18  or  19. 

In  the  young  animal,  while  the  teeth  are  still  unworn  to  any  extent, 
the  upper  and  lower  incisors  meet  in  such  a  way  that  they  appear 
as  an  evenly  rounded  arch.  This  arch,  however,  gradually  changes 
as  the  teeth  wear  away,  until  in  age  it  has  become  very  angular  or 
pointed. 

In  examining  the  mouth  of  the  horse  to  determine  his  age,  three 
features  of  the  incisor  teeth  are  studied:  First,  the  angle  at  which 
the  uppers  and  lowers  meet;  second,  the  character  and  color  of  their 
crown  faces,  and,  third,  the  shape  and  appearance  of  the  tables. 

To  obtain  the  best  view  of  the  mouth,  grasp  the  upper  lip  firmly 
with  the  right  hand,  and  place  the  left  in  the  interdental  space  from 
the  right  side,  using  the  thumb  to  depress  the  lower  lip,  and  the 
back  of  the  hand  to  press  the  tongue  upward  and  backward.  In 
this  way  the  right  hand  serves  as  a  twitch  to  hold  the  horse,  while 
the  left  one  uncovers  the  lower  incisors. 

As  has  alread}^  been  stated,  the  temporary  teeth  are  all  up  and  in 
wear  at  about  the  age  of  11  months.  Between  the  ages  of  1  and  2 
the  incisors  remain  the  same  in  their  arrangement,  but  begin  to  show 
the  effects  of  wear. 

At  2  the  mouth  presents  very  much  the  same  appearance  as  it  does 
at  5,  the  difference  being  that  the  incisors  are  temporary  in  the  former 
and  permanent  in  the  latter,  and  that  the  2-year-old  has  but  fivt 
molars  on  the  side  of  each  jaw,  while  the  5-year-old  has  all  six.  This 
is  the  only  case  in  which  the  molars  might  render  assistance  in  the 
determination  of  the  age.  At  about  the  age  of  2^  years  the  tem- 
porary centrals  are  pushed  out  by  permanent  ones.  The  uppers  are 
usually  shed  a  few  weeks  before  the  lowers.  After  these  teeth  make 
their  appearance,  and  until  they  arc  up  and  in  wear,  the  horse  is 
rising,  that  is  approaching,  3. 

At  3  the  colt  has  two  permanent  incisors  (the  centrals)  and  four 
temporary  ones  (the  laterals  and  corners)  in  each  jaw.  The  centrals 
are  up  and  in  wear;  that  is,  they  are  on  a  level  with  the  temporary 
teeth.  The  permanent  centrals  are  seen  to  be  darker  or  more  yel- 
lowish in  color  than  their  neighbors,  and  to  have  a  well-marked 
groove  down  their  front  face.  Another  important  observation  to 
make  is  the  appearance  of  the  cups.     In  either  the  temporary  or  the 


AGE    BY   THE    TEETH.  97 

permanent  full  mouth  the  centrals,  having  been  in  wear  for  the  long- 
est period  of  time,  show  the  shallowest  cups,  while  in  the  3-year-old 
mouth  the  new  centrals,  having  been  in  wear  for  the  shortest  period 
of  time,  show  the  largest,  deepest,  and  blackest  ones.  The  colt  is 
said  to  be  3  years  past  when  the  permanent  centrals  show  wear  on 
both  their  front  and  rear  borders.  At  about  the  age  of  3£  years  the 
temporary  laterals  are  shed,  and  until  their  permanent  successors 
are  up  and  in  wear  the  colt  is  rising  4. 

At  4  the  colt  has  four  permanent  incisors  (the  centrals  and  later- 
als) and  two  temporary  ones  (the  corners)  in  each  jaw.  The  laterals 
are  worn  on  both  their  front  and  rear  borders,  and  the  cups  of  the 
lower  centrals,  having  been  in  wear  for  one  year  and  being  about  one- 
third  gone,  show  smaller  than  the  cups  of  the  laterals.  At  this  age 
the  contrast  between  the  large  permanent  incisors  and  the  small 
temporary  corners  is  very  striking.  The  colt  is  about  4^  years  old 
when  the  corners  begin  to  shed.  At  about  this  time  the  mouth  of 
the  male  begins  to  show  the  tushes.  After  the  temporary  corners 
have  all  been  shed,  and  until  the  four  permanent  corners  are  in  con- 
tact, the  colt  is  rising  5. 

At  5  the  mouth  is  full.  All  the  incisors  are  now  permanent,  and 
in  each  jaw  they  have  all  reached  the  same  level.  The  front  borders 
of  the  corners  are  in  wear  but  the  rear  borders  are  not  yet  up.  The 
cups  of  the  centrals,  having  been  in  wear  for  two  years,  are  about 
two-thirds  gone,  while  those  of  the  laterals,  having  been  in  wear  for 
one  year,  are  about  one-third  gone.  Usually  the  rear  borders  of  the 
corners  come  up  and  in  the  wear  while  the  animal  is  between  5  and 
6  years  old,  but  sometimes  they  do  not  come  up  as  they  should,  and 
such  a  condition  constitutes  what  is  known  as  a  shell  mouth.  This 
condition  may  cause  an  8-year-old  animal  to  be  mistaken  for  a  (>- 
year-old. 

At  6  the  cup  cavities  are  worn  entirely  out  of  the  centrals,  two- 
thirds  out  of  the  laterals,  and  one-third  out  of  the  corners.  At  6 
past,  a  notch  begins  to  form  on  the  outer  border  of  the  upper  corners. 

At  7  the  cups  are  gone  from  the  centrals  and  the  laterals,  and  the 
notch  which  began  forming  at  6  past  on  the  upper  corners  is  now  well 
marked.  The  enamel  is  now  beginning  to  lose  its  cement  covering, 
with  the  result  that  the  teeth  are  showing  whiter  than  they  did  when 
the  animal  was  6.  The  tables  of  the  centrals  are  becoming  oval  in 
form. 

At  8  the  blackened  cups  have  usually  disappeared  from  all  of  the 
lower  incisors,  although  in  some  cases  those  of  the  corners  persist  for 
a  year  or  two  longer.  The  notch  in  the  upper  corners  is  hardly  as 
prominent  at  this  age  as  it  was  at  7  because,  on  account  of  wear,  the 
angle  of  meeting  is  now  beginning  to  change,  and  the  upper  corners  in 


98  Tin:  akmy    iioksk   in   accidk.n  r  and  DISEASE. 

consequence  are  finding  ;i  greater  grinding  .surface  on  the  lower  ones. 
In  some  cases  the  dental  star  may  now  be  detected  between  the 
enamel  island  and  the  front  border  of  the  tooth  in  the  central  in- 
cisors.    It  appears  in  the  form  of  a  yellowish  transverse  line. 

After  the  age  of  6  wear  alone,  by  changing  the  form  and  appear- 
ance of  the  table  surfaces  and  the  angle  at  which  the  uppers  and 
lowers  meet,  furnishes  the  indications  of  age;  and  as  the  wear  varies 
with  the  hardness  of  the  teeth  and  the  character  of  the  food,  it  is  at 
once  apparent  that  no  two  cases  will  be  exactly  the  same.  Hence, 
after  the  animal  is  8  years  old  the  age  indications  have  become  un- 
reliable. From  now  on  with  the  passing  of  each  year  they  become 
less  and  less  reliable.  After  the  twelfth  year  there  is  but  little  prob- 
ability of  judging  the  age  accurately. 

On  an  average  it  is  found  that  the  cups  of  the  upper  incisors  are 
worn  out  in  the  centrals  at  the  age  of  10. 

At  15  in  most  cases  the  enamel  island  has  disappeared  from  the 
lowers,  and  the  dental  star  has  become  distinct  and  round  in  the 
center  of  the  tables.  The  enamel  island  persists  in  the  uppers  usually 
until  the  animal  is  about  18. 

After  20  the  horse  is  considered  to  have  reached  the  limit  of  his 
life.  The  characters  then  presented  by  the  teeth  are  those  of  extreme 
age.  The  table  surfaces  are  elongated  from  front  to  rear.  Some- 
times the  crowns  are*  very  long  and  extend  almost  in  prolongation  of 
the  jaws.  Sometimes  they  are  very  short  and  are  worn  down  to  a 
level  with  the  gums.  The  crowms  now  appear  to  converge  toward 
the  median  line,  whereas  in  youth  they  appeared  straight  or  slightly 
divergent. 

Many  deceptions  may  be  practiced  or  many  conditions  may  exist 
which  render  the  determination  of  the  age  very  difficult.  Some  dis- 
honest dealers  and  breeders  resort  to  pulling  the  milk  teeth  a  few 
months  before  they  would  fall,  thereby  hastening  the  appearance  of 
the  permanent  ones  and  giving  the  mouth  an  older  appearance. 
Sometimes  the  notches  in  the  upper  corners  are  rasped  away  to  make 
the  7-year-old  mouth  look  younger.  " Bishoping"  is  another  form 
of  deception  that  is  sometimes  practiced.  This  is  done  to  make  an 
old  mouth  appear  young.  New  cups  are  drilled  in  the  old  teeth,  and 
these  cups  are  then  stained  black  by  some  artificial  means.  This 
practice,  however,  should  never  deceive  the  close  observer  because 
the  ring  of  enamel,  which  is  always  present  around  the  natural  cup. 
can  not  be  reproduced  in  the  bishoped  mouth.  Moreover  the  teeth 
will  show  by  the  angle  at  which  they  meet  and  by  the  form  of  their 
table  surfaces  that  the  mouth  is  too  old  for  cups  to  be  present. 

Horses  with  parrot  or  overshot  mouths,  and  horses  in  the  habit  of 
cribbing,  subject  their  teeth  to  unnatural  wear,  which  renders  the 
determination  of  their  age  very  difficult. 


E    XIX 

Longitudinal  Section  of  left  central  lower  incisor  and  cross  sections 
of  same  tooth  showing  table  surfaces  as  they  appear  at  the  ages  of  3, 
5,  7,  9,   '5.  20  and    25  years. 

..Cement  1) Dentine  E Enamel 

I .Infundibuium  Iv Cup  I   Pulp   Cavity 

S Star 


•L  ,-rV 


PLATE  XlXa. 


J| 

^I^^M^y 

^99^F«^fl^^l 

MM 

~    Ei^Bk 

i  p^5*Ij 

JJ>.« 

---..                  ■^tB 

fet 

^T 

M    fr                                          ^ 

5, 

TSOo 

Surra:   Characteristic  swellings. 


PLATE  XX. 


Surra  parasite 


CHAPTER  XIII. 


TROPICAL  DISEASES. 

SURRA. 

This  disease  is  caused  by  the  Trypanosoma  Evansi,  an  organism 
which  is  a  low  form  of  animal  life  and  is  found  in  the  blood  of  affected 
animals.  It  attacks  and  destroys  the  red  blood  cells,  causing  rapid 
loss  of  flesh  and,  sooner  or  later,  death.  It  is  claimed  by  some  au- 
thorities that  the  disease  originates  from  the  use  of  water  and  grass 
from  low  lands. 

Symptoms. — Variable  temperature,  ranging  from  normal  to  102° 
and  even  to  106°  F. ;  dullness;  lack  of  vigor;  sometimes  swelling  of 
the  submaxillary  lymph  glands;  thin,  watery  discharge  from  the 
nostrils;  swelling  of  the  sheath  and  legs,  more  frequently  the  hind 
ones  (Plate  XIX),  and  swelling  along  the  belly;  these  swellings  pit 
on  pressure.  The  mucous  membrane  of  the  eye,  especially  of  the 
haw,  shows  dark-red  spots  (petechial  spots) ;  the  urine  is  highly  col- 
ored and  is  usually  passed  in  large  quantities;  the  bowels  are  con- 
st ij >ated  in  the  early  stage  and  profuse  diarrhea  occurs  later.  In 
chronic  cases  paralysis  of  the  hind  extremities  takes  place,  the  ani- 
mal staggering  when  moved.  The  paralysis  may  later  become  com- 
plete and  the  horse  will  be  unable  to  rise.  In  the  acute  type  of  the 
disease  the  animal  dies  in  twelve  or  fifteen  days,  while  in  the  chronic 
case  he  may  linger  for  one  or  two  months.  The  diagnosis  is  com- 
plete only  when  a  microscopic  examination  of  the  blood  discloses  the 
parasite  (Plate  XX).  As  a  ride,  the  parasite  is  seen  only  when  the 
temperature  is  considerably  elevated. 

Surra  is  always  fatal,  and  as  the  danger  to  other  animals  is  great 
on  account  of  its  highly  contagious  nature,  all  animals  that  have 
been  proved  to  have  the  parasite  in  the  blood  should  be  removed  at 
once  from  contact  with  health)"  stock  and  destroyed.  The  carcasses 
should  be  saturated  with  oil  and  burned.  Measures  to  prevent  the 
spread  of  the  disease  should  always  be  enforced.  When  in  a  district 
infested  with  surra  the  temperature  of  horses  should  be  taken  regu- 
larly  every   two   or  three   days.     Any   animal   showing,   without   a 

99 


100  THE   ARMY   HORSE   IN   ACCIDENT  AND   DISEASE. 

known  cause,  a  temperature  of  102°  F.  should  be  isolated,  and  there- 
after blood  examinations  should  be  made  and  temperatures  taken 
daily.  As  flies  are  known  to  be  carriers  of  the  surra  parasite,  great 
care  should  be  exercised  to  remove  and  avoid  any  breeding  places 
for  these  pests.  If  stables  could  be  screened  in  would  be  a  great 
advantage  in  surra  outbreaks. 

EPIZOOTIC    OR    ULCERATIVE    LYMPHANGITIS. 

This  peculiar  tropical  disease  closely  resembles  glanders  of  the 
farcv  form,  so  much  so  that  the  two  might  be  easily  confused  by  a 
person  uninformed  on  tropical  diseases.  In  observing  epizootic  lym- 
phangitis the  high  fever  and  sudden  loss  of  flesh  and  vigor  are  not 
seen  as  in  tropical  glanders. 

The  disease  in  the  early  stage  responds  to  treatment,  but  often 
requires  months  to  effect  a  cure.  It  is  caused  by  a  fungus,  called 
cryptoeoceus,  and  is  contagious. 

Symptoms. — Small  bunches  or  nodules,  the  size  of  a  half  dollar, 
may  appear  upon  the  skin  of  any  part  of  the  body:  there  may  be 
one  or  many.  They  often  appear  in  chains  along  the  course  of  the 
lymphatics  (1,  Plate  XXI);  they  may  spread  around  an  infected 
area  into  an  irregular  patch  (2,  Plate  XXI),  apparently  not  following 
the  lymphatics;  again,  the  disease  may  start  with  a  hard,  painful 
swelling  in  the  region  of  the  chest  or  shoulder,  or  between  the  fore- 
legs, the  swelling  later  softening  in  spots  and  forming  the  small 
abscesses. 

Ordinarily,  the  nodules  soon  soften  and  break  upon  the  surface: 
if  not,  they  should  be  opened;  in  either  case  they  end  in  the  typical 
ulcers  of  the  disease.  The  small  bunches  or  abscesses,  when  opened, 
contain  a  white,  creamy  pus;  they  do  not  respond  readily  to  ordinary 
healing  methods  and  persist  after  the  most  heroic  measures  have 
been  adopted.  In  cases  of  long  standing  the  ulcerations  may  extend 
over  the  greater  part  of  the  body,  the  limbs  especially  being  covered 
with  sores;  there  is  usually  great  enlargement  and  thickening  of  the 
legs  and  the  patient  becomes  badly  emaciated  (poor  in  flesh).  In 
the  ordinary  case,  however,  the  animal  does  not  lose  flesh  and 
does  not  carry  any  marked  fever. 

Treatment. — The  treatment  consists  in  opening  the  ulcers  freely 
with  a  knife  or  cautery  point  heated  to  white  heat,  or,  better  still, 
if  they  are  not  too  numerous,  in  dissecting  them  out  entirely  with- 
out opening  the  abscess  wall. 

The  dressings  must  be  of  a  caustic  nature,  so  as  to  destroy  the 
cause  of  the  disease;  for  instance,  alcohol  4  ounces,  salicylic  acid 
1  ounce,  bichloride  of  mercury  2  drams;  alternate  this  with  a  dress- 
ing made  of  equal  parts  of  olive  oil  and  creolin,  or  one  made  of 
tincture  of  iodine  2  ounces  and  tincture  of  iron  2  ounces.     Apply 


^     OF  THE 

UNIVERSITY 

OF 
^AL'FORN^ 


TROPICAL   DISEASES.  101 

any  of  these  dressings  once  daily  and  then  use  a  dusting  powder 
made  of  equal  parts  of  iodoform  and  tannic  acid. 

Care  should  be  exercised  to  isolate  the  diseased  animals  and  to 
thoroughly  disinfect  combs,  brushes,  blankets,  halters,  and  such 
articles  as  may  have  come  in  contact  with  the  diseased  parts;  for 
this  purpose  use  a  1  to  20  solution  of  creolin  or  of  carbolic  acid. 

DIIOBIE    ITCH. 

This  is  a  very  troublesome  skin  disease  peculiar  to  the  Tropics. 
It  is  contagious  and  caused  by  a  fungus. 

Symptoms. — Itching,  the  animal  rubbing  against  the  posts  and 
sides  of  the  stall;  small  eruptions  of  the  skin,  which  spread  rapidly 
and  discharge  a  thin,  watery  secretion,  crusts  forming  over  the  sores; 
the  hair  falls  out  and  the  skin  becomes  thickened  on  account  of  the 
irritation.  Often  the  skin  of  a  large  part  of  the  surface  of  the  body 
becomes  infected  with  these  sores,  and  ordinary  healing  washes 
have  no  beneficial  action.  The  treatment,  like  that  of  epizootic 
lymphangitis,  should  be  prompt  and  energetic,  and,  since  both  dis- 
eases are  caused  by  a  fungus,  should  be  similar  in  nature.  One  of  the 
most  valuable  remedies  is  made  of  equal  parts  of  olive  oil  and  creolin, 
which  should  be  applied  once  daily  after  thoroughly  washing  the  sores 
and  removing  the  scabs.  A  mixture  of  alcohol  6  ounces  and  sali- 
cylic acid  1  ounce  is  of  value  and  is  applied  daily.  In  the  absence 
of  alcohol,  sulphuric  ether  may  be  substituted.  Tincture  of  iodine 
often  effects  a  cure.  If  the  case  is  persistent,  cauterize  the  parts 
with  pure  carbolic  acid  and  then  apply  alcohol  after  the  acid  has 
been  on  one  minute.  After  cauterizing  use  the  olive  oil  and  creolin 
dressing  daily. 

On  account  of  its  contagious  nature,  all  animals  suffering  from 
this  disease  should  be  isolated,  and  brushes,  combs,  blankets,  etc., 
should  be  thoroughly  disinfected  with  creolin  or  carbolic  acid 
solution. 


The  common  diseases  of  temperate  countries  assume  a  more 
aggravated  form  in  the  Tropics.  Infectious  disease's  are  more  fatal 
and  infected  wounds  heal  more  slowly.  This  is  due  to  the  lower 
vitality  of  the  animal  and  to  the  hot  and  moist  climate,  which  favors 
germ  growth.  Pneumonia  is  almost  always  fatal  in  the  Philippines. 
Canker  and  thrush  are  found  in  the  most  aggravated  type.  Peri- 
odic ophthalmia  is  very  prevalent,  resulting  in  many  animals  becom- 
ing blind.  Heatstroke  is  a  frequent  occurrence1,  on  account  i^  the 
excessive  heat  and  moisture,  and  is  fatal  in  the  majority  of  ca 
The  temperature   in  heatstroke  frequently  rises  to   110°  to  113°  F. 


102  THE   ARMY    EOBSE    IN    ACCIDENT   AND   DISEASE. 

Glanders,  which   is  very  common,  runs  a  rapid   and   fatal  course. 

American  horses  rarely  suffer  from  the  chronic  form  of  the  disease 
often  manifested  in  cooler  climates. 

In  the  Tropics  a  careful  daily  inspection  of  the  horses  should  ho 
made  and  the  temperature  of  even  animal  should  he  taken  at  least 
once  a  wends..  Any  animal  with  a  suspicious  discharge  from  the  nose 
or  with  sores  upon  the  body  indicating  farcy  buds  and  any  animal 
showing  a  rise  of  2  degrees  above  normal  temperature  should  be 
isolated  and  kept  under  observation  by  a  veterinarian.  Jn  case  of 
an  outbreak,  temperatures  should  be  taken  daily.  Normal  tem- 
perature in  the  Tropics  is  usually  about  1  degree  higher  than  in  a  cool 
climate,  and  it  may  rise  as  much  as  4  degrees  with  exercise  of  a 
moderate  nature.  These  facts  should  be  taken  into  consideration  in 
recording  temperatures. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


MEDICINES ;  THEIR  ACTION  AND  USES. 

Antiseptics. — Remedies  which  arrest  putrefaction.  They  kill  or 
prevent  the  development  of  those  bacteria  which  produce  decompo- 
sition. 

Examples:  Corros.  sub.,  carbolic  acid,  creolin. 

Disinfectants.— Destroy  the  specific  poisons  of  communicable 
diseases  by  killing  those  germs  which  produce  disease. 

Examples:  Lime,  sulphur  gas,  etc 

Deodorants. — Disguise  or  destroy  odors. 

Examples:  Iron  sulphate,  carbolic  acid,  etc. 

Rubefacients. — Cause  redness  of  the  skin. 

Examples:  Alcohol,  turpentine;  etc. 

Vesicants. — Cause  a  discharge  of  serum  from  the  skin. 

Example:  Cantharides. 

Stomachics. — Promote  digestion. 

Examples:  Gentian,  ginger,  etc. 

Vermicides. — Kill  worms. 

Examples:  Turpentine,  iron  sulphate,  etc. 

Vermifuges. — Remove  intestinal  worms  by  purgation. 

Parasiticides. — Destro}r  parasites. 

Examples:  Carbolic  acid,  creolin,  etc. 

Purgatives. — Evacuate  the  bowels. 

Examples:  Aloes. 

Laxatives. — Mild  purgatives. 

Examples:  Bran  mash,  small  dose  of  linseed  oil. 

Cliolagogues. — Promote  secretion  of  bile. 

Examples:  Aloes,  calomel. 

Diaphoretics. — Increase  perspiration. 

Examples:  Ethers.  Same  action  produced  mechanically  by  warm 
clothing. 

Diuretics. — Increase  secretion  of  urine. 

Examples:  Potass,  nit.,  turpentine. 

Tonics. — Gradually  but  permanently  improve  appetite  and  increase 

vigor. 

Examples:  Quinine,  iron,  gentian,  etc. 

103 


104  THE    A.BMY    EOBSE    IX    ACCIDENT    AND    DISEASE. 

Anesthetics.     Produce  loss  of  consciousness. 

Example:  Chloroform. 

Styptics.—  Check  hemorrhage. 

Example:  Tincture  of  iron. 

(  Rustics.-    Destroy  tissue  by  burning. 

Examples:  Lunar  causl  ic,  copper  sulphate,  etc. 

Expectorants. — Act  upon  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  respiratory 
organs  and  cause  an  expulsion  of  their  secretions. 

Example:  Chloride  of  ammonia. 

Stimulants. — Promptly  but  temporarily  increase  nervous  vigor, 
thus  increasing  action  of  the  heart  and  other  functions. 

Examples:  Alcohol,  ammonia,  ether. 

Alteratives. — Correct  morbid  conditions  without  causing  marked 
physiological  effects. 

Examples:  Iodide  of  potassium,  potassium  nitrate. 

Astringents. —Contract  living  tissues. 

Examples:  Alum,  zinc  sulphate,  tannic  acid. 

Sedatives. — Depress  (slow)  the  nervous  system. 

Example:  Potas.  bromide. 

Anodynes. — Relieve  pain  by  diminishing  the  excitability  of  nerves 
and  nerve  centers. 

Examples:  Opium,  belladonna. 

Antispasmodics. — Prevent  or  remove  spasmodic  contractions  of 
voluntary  or  involuntary  muscles. 

Examples:  Belladonna,  sulphuric  ether. 

Carminatives. — Aid  in  the  expulsion  of  gas  from  the  intestines  by 
increasing  natural  movement,  stimulating  circulation,  etc. 

Examples:  Capsicum,  ginger,  aromatic  spts.  ammonia,  sulphuric 
ether,  etc. 

Vt  lirifuges  or  antipyretics. — Agents  which  reduce  high  temperature 
of  the  blood;  reduce  fever. 

Examples:  Acetanilid,  cold  water. 

VETEKIX AK Y    M EDICIX ES . 

Acetanilid. — Is  a  febrifuge  and  antiseptic.  Used  internally  to 
lower  fever  in  doses  of  from  1  to  4  drams.  Used  externally  as  an 
antiseptic  in  the  form  of  a  dry  dressing. 

Acid,  arsenious  (arsenic). — Is  an  irritant,  corrosive  poison,  given 
internally  in  doses  of  from  1  to  G  grains  as  a  digestive  tonic,  and  for 
skin  diseases,  usually  in  combination  with  iron  sulphate  and  gentian. 
Externally  it  is  used  to  remove  warts,  in  the  form  of  an  ointment,  1 
pari  <•!'  arsenic  to  8  or  10  of  lard. 

Acid,  ooracic. — Action,  antiseptic;  a  saturated  solution  i-  very 
useful  in  conjunctivitis.  With  oxide  of  zinc  it  makes  a  very  nice 
dressing  for  abrasions,  scratches,  etc. 


medicines;  their  actions  and  uses.  105 

Acid,  carbolic. — A  valuable  antiseptic  and  disinfectant.     A  1  to  20 
solution  makes  a  very  good  wash  for  all  wounds.     A  very  good  pre- 
scription for  local  use  is  the  following: 
Carbolic  acid,  6  drams. 
Glycerin,  lh  ounces. 
Water  to  make  1  pint. 
Acid,  salicylic. — A  useful  antiseptic;    a  saturated  solution  of  sali- 
cylic acid  in  alcohol  is  a  good  dressing  for  indolent  sores  and  ulcers. 
Salicylic  acid  dusted  upon  a  wound  will  remove  the  granulations 
of  proud  flesh. 

Acid,  tannic. — An  astringent  and  antiseptic.     It  is  given  internally 
in  diarrhea  and  dysentery.     Dose,  30  grains  to  1  dram. 
The  following  prescription  may  be  used: 
Acid,  tannic,  J  to  1  dram. 
Opium,  powdered,  \  to  1  dram. 
Make  into  one  ball  and  repeat  every  two  hours  until  the  diarrhea 
is  checked. 

Tannic  acid  is  an  excellent  remedy,  used  in  the  form  of  a  saturated 
solution  (with  witch-hazel  water),  for  hardening  tender  shoulders. 

Aconite. — Is  a  dangerous  poison  and  should  not  be  used  internally, 
but  locally.  Mixed  with  other  drugs  it  makes  a  good  anodyne  lini- 
ment. 

Aconite,  2  ounces. 
Alcohol,  5  ounces. 
Opium,  tincture,  4  ounces. 
Witch-hazel,  distilled,  5  ounces. 
Mix,  and  apply  several  times  daily. 

AlcoTiol. — Stimulant.     Given  for  weak  heart  in   debilitating  dis- 
eases, such  as  lung  troubles,  etc.     Dose,  2  to  4  ounces  in  1  pint  of 
water,  and  repeated  every  four  to  six  hours,  as  required. 
It  is  useful  in  the  formation  of  liniments. 

Aloes,  Barbados.- — Is  the  general  purgative  for  the  horse.  Dose, 
6  to  8  drams. 

Aloes,  Barbados,  6  to  8  drains. 
Ginger,  1  dram. 
Make  into  a  ball  and  give  upon  an  empty  stomach. 
The  "cathartic  capsule, "  to  be  supplied,  will  take  the  place  of  aloes. 
It  will  contain  aloin,  strychnine,  ginger,  and  calomel. 

A  purgative  should  never  be  given  in  diseases  <>f  the  respiratory 
system. 

It  generally  takes  about  twenty-four  hours  to  operate. 
Alum. — Astringent.     It  is  useful  as  a  wash  for  sore  mouths:  used 
in  the  strength  of  \  ounce  to  1  quart  of  water.      Externally  it  is  a 
valuable  remedy  in  the  treatment  of  thrush.     Burnt  alum  is  useful 
for  the  removal  of  proud  flesh. 


106  TIIK   AK.MV    HORSE   IN    ACCIDENT    AND    DIBEASB. 

Ammonia,  aromatic  spirits  of — Stimulant  and  carminative.  A 
very  useful  remedy  in  the  t  real  ment  of  colics,  and  exhaustion.  Dose, 
I  to  ■">  ounces,  well  diluted. 

Ammonia,  solution  of. — \~*v<\  externally  only,  in  combination  with 
other  drugs,  as  a  stimulating  liniment . 
Ammonia,  solution  of,  1  part. 
Turpentine,  oil  of,  1  part. 
Olive  oil,  2  parts. 
To  be  well  shaken  before  using.     It  is  an  excellent  external  appli- 
cation for  sore  throat. 

Ammonia,  chloride  of — Used  in  all  cases  where  an  expectorant  is 
indicated,  such  as  diseases  of  the  respiratory  system.     Dose,  1  to   1 
drams.     For  catarrhal  diseases  it  is  usually  combined  with  quinine 
and  nitrate  of  potash,  prepared  in  the  following  manner: 
Ammonia,  chloride  of,  3  ounce-. 
Quinine  sulphate,  6  drams. 
Nitrate  of  potash,  3  ounces. 
Make  into  twelve  powders  and  give  one  every  three  of  four  hours. 
Belladonna,   fluid    extract. — Antispasmodic    and    anodyne.     Used 
in  cases  of  colic  in  conjunction  with  other  medicines.     Dose,  1  to  2 
drams. 

When  applied  to  the  eyes  it  dilates  the  pupil  and  soothes  the 
irritated  membrane.  Generally  used  in  combination  with  sulphate 
of  zinc  or  boracic-acid  solutions. 

A  very  useful  wash  for  the  treatment  of  conjunctivitis  is  made  as 
follows : 

Sulphate  of  zinc,  20  grains. 
Belladonna,  fid.  ext.,  1  dram. 
Water.  3\  ounces. 
Apply  twice  a  day. 

Camphor,    gum.- — Antispasmodic    and    antiseptic.     Dose,    1    to    2 
drams.     A  very  good  remedy  for  diarrhea  is  made  as  follows : 
Camphor,  gum,  1  dram. 
Opium,  powdered,  1  dram. 
Make  into  a  ball;  give,  and  repeat  every  two  hours  until  relief  is 
afforded. 

Externally  it  is  useful  for  sprains,  combined  with  other  medicines. 
forming  what  is  known  as  the  soap  liniment. 
Castile  soap,  10  parts. 
Camphor,  5  parts. 
Alcohol,  70  parts. 
"Water,  l.")  parts. 
To  be  used  only  externally  as  a  mild,  stimulating,  anodyne  liniment . 
A  useful  dressing  for  wounds  is  made  of  gum  camphor,  8  ounces, 
carbolic  acidj  3  ounces.     This  is  especially  valuable  in  fly  time. 


medicines;  their  actions  and  uses.  '107 

Cannabis  indica  (Indian  hemp). — Antispasmodic  and  anodyne. 
Its  main  use  is  in  colic,  as  it  relieves  pain  without  causing  constipation. 
Dose,  2  to  4  drams. 

Cannabis  indica,  2  to  4  drams. 
Ammonia,  aromatic  spirits,  1  ounce. 
Water,  1  pint. 

Give  at  one  dose  and  repeat  in  three-quarters  of  an  hour  if  necessary. 
This  is  an  excellent  remedy  for  colic. 

Cantharides,  powdered  (Spanish  fly). — Used  only  for  its  blistering 
effect.  Prepare  by  rubbing  the  cantharides  and  cosmoline  together 
(1  to  5  or  6)  with  a  spatula  on  a  piece  of  glass. 

Capsicum  (cayenne  pepper). — Stomachic  and  carminative.  Given 
internally  in  combination  with  gentian  and  ginger  in  mild  cases  of 
indigestion  attended  with  flatulency.     Dose,  ^  to  1  dram. 

Charcoal. — A  mild  antiseptic  and  deodorant.  It  is  very  good 
mixed  with  poultices,  especially  for  wounds  and  sores  that  have  a 
foul  odor.  It  may  be  dusted  on  the  surface  of  foul  sores  and  will  soon 
destroy  the  odor.  Internally  it  is  given  in  doses  of  2  to  4  drams, 
and  is  useful  in  chronic  indigestion  and  diarrhea. 

Copper  sulphate  (blue  vitriol,  bluestone). — A  caustic,  tonic,  vermi- 
cide, and  astringent.  Used  principally  as  a  caustic  for  thrush  and 
canker.  A  good  remedy  for  thrush  or  canker  is  equal  parts  of  sul- 
phate of  copper  (powdered),  sulphate  of  zinc,  and  sulphate  of  iron: 
"  The  three  sulphates."  This  powder  can  be  applied  two  or  three 
times  daily.  Used  also  internally  as  a  tonic  in  chronic  nasal 
catarrh.     Dose,  1  to  2  drams. 

Collodion. — When  painted  over  wounds  it  forms  an  air-tight 
coating  and  in  small  wounds  keeps  the  edges  in  a  fixed  position 
and  promotes  healing.  Especially  valuable  when  applied  to  punc- 
tured wounds  of  joints. 

Chloroform: — Antispasmodic,  stimulant,  and  anodyne.  Useful 
in  colics.  Dose,  1  to  2  drams,  well  diluted.  It  may  be  added  to 
anodyne  liniments.     When  inhaled,  it  acts  as  an  anesthetic. 

Cosmoline. — A  by-product  of  petroleum.  Used  as  a  base  for 
ointments.  It  is  also  valuable  to  apply  upon  the  skin,  when  wound 
secretions  are  abundant  to  prevent  dropping  out  of  the  hair. 

Creolin. — A  nonpoisonous,  nonirritating  antiseptic  and  para- 
siticide. It  is  one  of  the  best  medicines  that  we  have,  not  onlv  as 
a  valuable  application  for  all  wounds,  but  to  destroy  all  parasites 
with  which  the  animal  may  become  infested. 

Used  in  solution  or  ointment  in  a  strength  of  1  to  50  or  1  to  20. 
For  mange  it  is  used  in  a  1  to  10  solution. 

Digitalis,  fluid  extract  of. — A  very  dangerous  poison,  and  should 
not  be  administered  internally.  A  valuable  diuretic  when  applied 
over  the  kidneys  and  well  rubbed  in. 


108  THE   ARMY   HORSE   IN   ACCIDENT   AND   DISEASE. 

Ether,  nitrous,  spirits  of  (sweet  spirits  of  niter). — Stimulant, 
u i it  (spasmodic,  diurel  ic,  and  diaphoretic.     Dose,  1  to  2  ounces. 

A  very  useful  si  iinulant  in  all  cases  of  weakness  of  the  heart  action. 
For  its  stimulating  and  antispasmodic  actions  it  is  given  in  colics 
combined  with  belladonna  or  cannabis  indica. 

Ether,  sulphuric. — Stimulant,  antispasmodic,  and  carminative. 
Dose,  1  to  2  ounces,  well  diluted. 

Combined  with  belladonna  or  cannabis  indica  its  antispasmodic 
action  is  increased. 

Fi  nugreek. — Aromatic  and  stomachic.  Sometimes  combine*  1  with 
tonics  to  disguise  their  odors.     Dose,  1  ounce. 

Flaxseed  meal. — Used  for  poultices. 

Gentian. — Stomachic  and  bitter  tonic.  It  improves  the  appetite 
and  general  tone.     Dose,    \  to  1  ounce. 

Ginger. — Stomachic  and  carminative.  Combined  with  purgatives 
it  diminishes  their  tendency  to  gripe,  and  also  somewhat  hastens 
their  action.     Dose,  £  to  1  ounce. 

Glycerin. — Used  as  a  base  in  the  same  manner  as  cosmoline. 
Useful,  combined  with  equal  parts  of  iodine,  in  the  treatment  of 
grease. 

Iodine. — Given  internally  in  diabetes  insipidus.  Dose,  20  grains 
to  1  dram,  to  be  repeated  three  times  daily  until  the  quantity  of 
urine  is  lessened.     Best  given  made  into  a  ball  with  flaxseed  meal. 

Externally  it  is  used  for  the  removal  of  swellings,  curbs,  enlarged 
tendons,  etc.     It  is  also  a  useful  stimulant  for  indolent  sores  and 
ulcers.     A  good  solution  for  external  use  is  made  as  follows : 
Iodine,  1  ounce. 
Iodide  of  potassium,  3  ounces. 
Water,  1  pint. 

To  be  applied  several  times  daily. 

Tincture  of  iodine  is  made  of  iodine,  1  ounce:   alcohol,  1  pint. 

Iodoform. — Antiseptic.  Used  externally  as  a  dry  dressing,  either 
alone  or  combined  with  other  drugs,  such  as  boracic  acid,  acet- 
anilid  etc. 

Iron,  tincture  of  the  cMoride  of. — A  valuable  tonic,  building  up  the 
system  and  enriching  the  blood.  Useful  in  purpura  and  in  conva- 
lescence after  all  debilitating  diseases.  Dose,  1  to  2  ounces,  well 
diluted. 

I  feed  externally  as  an  astringent  and  styptic  in  serious  hemorrhages. 
A  small  piece  of  cotton  saturated  with  it  and  applied  to  the  bleeding 
part  is  the  proper  mode  of  application. 

Iron,  sulphate  of  (Ferrisulphate). — Tonic  and  vermicide.  It 
increases  the  appetite  and  builds  up  the  system.  Dose,  \  to  1  dram. 
Frequently  combined  with  mix  vomica,  etc. 


medicines;  their  actions  and  uses.  109 

Lanolin. — Used  as  a  base  for  ointments  in  the  same  manner  as 
cosmoline. 

Lead,  acetate  of. — Astringent  and  a  valuable  remedy  for  relieving 
local  pain.  Used  externally  to  cool  and  relieve  sprains,  inflamed 
tendons  and  joints,  and  to  relieve  itching  skin  diseases. 

The  white  lotion  is  made  as  follows: 
Acetate  of  lead,  1  ounce. 
Sulphate  of  zinc,  1  ounce. 
Water,  1  quart. 

Shake  well  and  apply  several  times  daily. 

The  lotion  is  a  very  valuable  remedy  for  the  relief  of  all  external 
diseases  accompanied  by  heat  and  swelling;  also  an  excellent  dressing 
for  wounds. 

Lime,  chloride  of. — This  is  the  best  disinfectant  that  we  have. 
Four  ounces  to  1  gallon  of  water  is  the  proper  strength.  This  solu- 
tion should  be  used  as  a  wash  for  the  disinfection  of  stables.  A 
small  portion  of  chloride  of  lime  placed  around  in  stables  will  destroy 
the  odor  arising  from  decomposed  urine. 

Lunar  caustic. — Used  for  the  removal  of  warts  and  proud  flesh. 
Four  grains  to  1  ounce  of  water  make  a  good  application  for  the 
removal  of  the  cloudiness  remaining  after  an  attack  of  ophthalmia. 

Mercury,  bichloride  of  (corrosive  sublimate;  antiseptic  tablets). — 
Dissolved  in  water  this  is  the  most  energetic  antiseptic;  1  to  1,000 
solution  is  the  proper  strength  to  use  in  the  treatment  of  all  wounds. 
Two  tablets  to  a  quart  of  water  give  this  strength;  if  the  bichloride 
is  in  bulk,  use  15  grains  to  a  quart  of  water,  and  add  15  grains  of 
chloride  of  ammonia  to  insure  complete  dissolution. 

Mercury,  mild  chloride  (calomel). — Internally,  a  cholagogue. 
Dose,  Ho  2  drams.  It  is  not  used  alone,  but  is  combined  with 
aloes. 

Calomel,  1  dram. 
Barbados  aloes,  4  drams. 
Ginger,  1  dram. 
Water  to  make  a  ball. 

Externally,  antiseptic  and  drying.  Used  in  the  treatment  of 
ulcers  and  thrush. 

Mercury,  biniodide. — Used  as  a  blister;  its  effects  are  very  pene- 
trating.    Used  principally  in  the  treatment  of  spavins,  splints,  side- 
bones,  ringbones,  and  all  bony  enlargements. 
Binioide  of  mercury,  1  part. 
Cosmoline,  5  to  6  parts. 

Mix  and  rub  together  thoroughly. 

Apply  with  friction  for  at  least  ten  minutes. 

Nux  vomica,  powdered. — A  nerve  stimulant  and  tonic.  Dose,  \  t<> 
1  dram.     It  is  a  very  useful  tonic  in  building  up  the  tone  of  the 


110  THE    Ali.MY    HORSE    IN    A.CCEDENT    AND    DISEASE. 

•in  in  convalescence  from  debilitating  diseases  and  general  lack 
of  vitality.     Generally  given  in  combination  with  gentian,  iron,  and 

other  tonics. 

Oil,  linseed. — Laxative  (mild  purgative).  Dose,  \  to  1  quart. 
Do  n<>t  use  boiled  oil. 

Oil,  olive. — Generally  used  as  a  vehicle  in  making  liniments  and 
oily  solul  ions. 

o'tl  of  tar  (pine  tar).-  Useful  for  plugging  holes  and  cavities  in  the 
hoof  after  all  suppuration  has  ceased. 

Oil  of  turpentine. — Diuretic,  stimulant,  antispasmodic,  vermicide, 
and  expectorant.     Dose,  1  to  3  ounces  diluted  with  oil. 

Externally  it  is  used  in  the  formation  of  liniments  (see  Solution 
of  Ammonia). 

Opium,  tincture  of  (laudanum). — Anodyne,  antispasmodic.  Checks 
secretion  of  mucus  membrane.  On  account  of  these  properties  it  is 
a  valuable  remedy  in  diarrhea  and  dysentery. 

Very  useful  in  the  treatment  of  all  abdominal  pain  where  there 
are  no  symptoms  of  constipation,  but  as  a  rule  belladonna  and 
cannabis  indica  are  preferable.     Dose,  1  to  2  ounces. 

Externally,  opium  tincture  is  used  to  relieve  pain  of  sprains  and 
bruises. 

A  very  good  anodyne  lotion  is  made  as  follows: 
Opium  tincture,  4  ounces. 
Acetate  of  lead,  2  ounces. 
Water  to  make  1  quart. 

Apply  every  few  hours. 

Opium,  powdered. — Not  used  externally.  It  is  used  internally  for 
the  same  purpose  as  the  tincture.     Dose,  |  to  2  drams. 

Potassium  bromide. — Nerve  sedative.  Dose,  h  to  2  ounces.  In 
tetanus  this  medicine  can  be  given  in  large  doses. 

Potassium  nitrate  (saltpeter). — Alterative,  febrifuge,  and  diuretic. 
Dose,  1  to  4  drams.  In  the  treatment  of  laminitis  the  dose  is  2  to  4 
ounces,  repeated  three  times  a  day.  Externally  it  makes  a  good 
cooling  lotion: 

Nitrate  potassium  (saltpeter),  5  ounces 
Chloride  of  ammonia,  5  ounces. 
Water,  10  ounces. 

Mix  and  keep  the  affected  parts  saturated  with  this  lotion. 

Internally,  saltpeter  is  a  most  excellent  medicine  in  the  treatment 
of  catarrhal  and  febrile  diseases.  It  is  also  useful  in  the  treatment  of 
swollen  legs. 

Potassium  iodide. — Alterative,  diuretic,  and  expectorant.  Dose,  2 
to  4  drams.  It  is  given  to  promote  absorption  of  enlargements,  such 
as  enlarged  glands  in  lymphangitis,  and  in  partial  paralysis  resulting 
from  injury  to  the  brain  or  spinal  cord. 


medicines;  their  actions  and  uses.  Ill 

For  such  purposes  full  doses  are  given  twice  a  day  for  two  weeks. 

Potassium  p<  rmanganate. — Antiseptic,  disinfectanl ,  and  deodorant. 
Useful  for  the  removal  of  foul  odors  arising  from  unhealthy  wounds: 
also  for  cleaning  hands  and  instruments.  From  1  to  4  drains,  water 
1  pint,  is  the  proper  strength  of  the  solution  for  use. 

Quinine,  sulpha//  of. — Tonic,  stomachic,  antiseptic,  and  mild 
febrifuge.  Dose,  ]  to  1  dram,  repeated  three  times  a  day.  It  is 
given  in  all  febrile  and  debilitating  diseases.  Combined  with  sul- 
phate of  iron  it  is  very  useful  in  purpura.  In  influenza  and  pneu- 
monia it  is  generally  combined  with  gentian  and  nitrate  of  potash, 
made  into  powders  in  the  following  proportions: 
Quinine  sulphate,  1  ounce. 
Gentian,  3  ounces. 

Make  twelve  powders  and  give  three  times  a  day. 

Salol. — Antiseptic.  Used  internally  and  externally  for  its  anti- 
septic properties.     Dose,  2  to  4  drams. 

Sodium  bicarbonate. — Carminative,  stomachic,  relieves  acidity  of 
the  stomach.  Dose,  1  to  2  drams.  This  is  an  excellent  medicine  in 
chronic  indigestion  and  flatulency. 

Sulphur. — Parasiticide.  This  medicine  may  be  used  for  the  treat- 
ment of  mange,  but  it  is  inferior  to  creolin  or  carbolic  acid. 

Witch-hazel. — A  cooling  astringent  wash,  very  useful  when  com- 
bined with  other  medicines  in  the  form  of  liniments  or  lotions. 

Zinc  sulphate. — Externally  it  is  much  used  as  a  caustic  and  astrin- 
gent for  wounds,  foul  ulcers,  etc.     It  is  an  excellent  remedy  for  the 
treatment  of  thrush  and  canker. 
Sulphate  of  zinc        j 
Sulphate  of  copper.  [Equal  parts. 
Sulphate  of  iron        I 

Zinc  oxide. — Antiseptic  and  astringent.  Used  either  as  a  dry 
powder  dusted  on  the  wounds  or  can  be  made  into  an  ointment  with 
lanolin: 

Zinc  oxide,  1  part. 
Lanolin,  6  parts. 

Zinc  chloride. — An  irritant  and  corrosive  poison,  never  given  inter- 
nally. Externally  it  is  applied  as  a  stimulant,  astringent,  caustic. 
and  parasiticide.  It  is  also  used  as  an  antiseptic,  disinfectant,  and 
deodorant.  From  2  to  4  drams  to  the  pint  of  water  are  used  for 
ordinary  antiseptic  purposes. 

DOSES. 

Grouped  according  to  amounts;  for  reference  and  for  convenience 
in  memorizing: 

GRAINS. 

Arsenic  1  to  6.  Iodine  20  to   60. 

5417—09 8 


11  '2  THE    AK.MY    HOBSE    IX    ACCIDENT    AND    DISEASE. 


DRAMS. 

'...  to  I. 

Capsicum;  Iron  Bulphate;  Xux    vomica,    powdered;  (<>iiiiiiii>-   sulphate;  Tannic 
acid. 
'._.  to  2. 

i  !alomel ;  <  >pium,  powdered. 
I  to  2 

Belladona,  Quid  extract;  Camphor,  gum;  Chloroform;  Copper  sulphate;  Sodium 
bicarbonate. 

1  to  4 

Acetanilid;  Ammonia,  chloride;  Potassium,  nitrate. 

2  to  4 

Cannabis  indica,  fluid  extract;  Charcoal;  Potassium  iodide;  Salol. 
i;  to  8 

Aloes. 

OUNCES. 

i,,  ml 

Gentian;  Ginger. 
1 

Fenugreek. 
>._.  to  2 

Bromide  of  potassium. 
I  to2 

Sulphuric  ether;  Sweet  spirits  of  niter;  Tinct.  Chloride  of  iron:  Tinct.  Opium. 

1  to  3 

Aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia;  Oil  of  turpentine. 

2  to4 

Alcohol;  Potassium  nitrate  (in  laminitis). 


o 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 


This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 

Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


5  Jc'S3yY 


General  Library 
LD  21-50m-12,'61  University  of  California 

(C4796sl0)47Q  Berkeley 


i90989L,3™RY 


